Protocols
The following protocols are available globally.
-
GtkApplicationis a high-level API for writing applications.It supports many aspects of writing a GTK application in a convenient fashion, without enforcing a one-size-fits-all model.
Currently,
GtkApplicationhandles GTK initialization, application uniqueness, session management, provides some basic scriptability and desktop shell integration by exporting actions and menus and manages a list of toplevel windows whose life-cycle is automatically tied to the life-cycle of your application.While
GtkApplicationworks fine with plain [classGtk.Window]s, it is recommended to use it together with [classGtk.ApplicationWindow].Automatic resources
GtkApplicationwill automatically load menus from theGtkBuilderresource located at “gtk/menus.ui”, relative to the application’s resource base path (seeg_application_set_resource_base_path()). The menu with the ID “menubar” is taken as the application’s menubar. Additional menus (most interesting submenus) can be named and accessed via [methodGtk.Application.get_menu_by_id] which allows for dynamic population of a part of the menu structure.It is also possible to provide the menubar manually using [method
Gtk.Application.set_menubar].GtkApplicationwill also automatically setup an icon search path for the default icon theme by appending “icons” to the resource base path. This allows your application to easily store its icons as resources. See [methodGtk.IconTheme.add_resource_path] for more information.If there is a resource located at “gtk/help-overlay.ui” which defines a [class
Gtk.ShortcutsWindow] with ID “help_overlay” thenGtkApplicationassociates an instance of this shortcuts window with each [classGtk.ApplicationWindow] and sets up the keyboard accelerator <kbd>Control</kbd>+<kbd>?</kbd> to open it. To create a menu item that displays the shortcuts window, associate the item with the actionwin.show-help-overlay.A simple application
A simple example is available in the GTK source code repository
GtkApplicationoptionally registers with a session manager of the users session (if you set the [propertyGtk.Application:register-session] property) and offers various functionality related to the session life-cycle.An application can block various ways to end the session with the [method
Gtk.Application.inhibit] function. Typical use cases for this kind of inhibiting are long-running, uninterruptible operations, such as burning a CD or performing a disk backup. The session manager may not honor the inhibitor, but it can be expected to inform the user about the negative consequences of ending the session while inhibitors are present.See Also
HowDoI: Using GtkApplication, Getting Started with GTK: Basics
The
See moreApplicationProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkApplicationinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeApplication. Alternatively, useApplicationRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ApplicationProtocol : ApplicationProtocol
-
The
GtkBoxwidget arranges child widgets into a single row or column.
Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its [property
Gtk.Orientable:orientation] property. Within the other dimension, all children are allocated the same size. Of course, the [propertyGtk.Widget:halign] and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties can be used on the children to influence their allocation.Use repeated calls to [method
Gtk.Box.append] to pack widgets into aGtkBoxfrom start to end. Use [methodGtk.Box.remove] to remove widgets from theGtkBox. [methodGtk.Box.insert_child_after] can be used to add a child at a particular position.Use [method
Gtk.Box.set_homogeneous] to specify whether or not all children of theGtkBoxare forced to get the same amount of space.Use [method
Gtk.Box.set_spacing] to determine how much space will be minimally placed between all children in theGtkBox. Note that spacing is added between the children.Use [method
Gtk.Box.reorder_child_after] to move a child to a different place in the box.CSS nodes
GtkBoxuses a single CSS node with name box.Accessibility
GtkBoxuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBox. Alternatively, useBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoxProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkCssProvideris an object implementing theGtkStyleProviderinterface for CSS.It is able to parse CSS-like input in order to style widgets.
An application can make GTK parse a specific CSS style sheet by calling [method
Gtk.CssProvider.load_from_file] or [methodGtk.CssProvider.load_from_resource] and adding the provider with [methodGtk.StyleContext.add_provider] or [funcGtk.StyleContext.add_provider_for_display].In addition, certain files will be read when GTK is initialized. First, the file
$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.cssis loaded if it exists. Then, GTK loads the first existing file amongXDG_DATA_HOME/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css,$HOME/.themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css,$XDG_DATA_DIRS/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.cssandDATADIR/share/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk-VARIANT.css, whereTHEMEis the name of the current theme (see the [propertyGtk.Settings:gtk-theme-name] setting),VARIANTis the variant to load (see the [propertyGtk.Settings:gtk-application-prefer-dark-theme] setting),DATADIRis the prefix configured when GTK was compiled (unless overridden by theGTK_DATA_PREFIXenvironment variable), andVERSIONis the GTK version number. If no file is found for the current version, GTK tries older versions all the way back to 4.0.To track errors while loading CSS, connect to the [signal
Gtk.CssProvider::parsing-error] signal.The
See moreCssProviderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCssProviderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCssProvider. Alternatively, useCssProviderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CssProviderProtocol : ObjectProtocol, StyleProviderProtocol
-
GtkDrawingAreais a widget that allows drawing with cairo.
It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:
The [signal
Gtk.Widget::realize] signal to take any necessary actions when the widget is instantiated on a particular display. (Create GDK resources in response to this signal.)The [signal
Gtk.DrawingArea::resize] signal to take any necessary actions when the widget changes size.Call [method
Gtk.DrawingArea.set_draw_func] to handle redrawing the contents of the widget.
The following code portion demonstrates using a drawing area to display a circle in the normal widget foreground color.
Simple GtkDrawingArea usage
static void draw_function (GtkDrawingArea *area, cairo_t *cr, int width, int height, gpointer data) { GdkRGBA color; GtkStyleContext *context; context = gtk_widget_get_style_context (GTK_WIDGET (area)); cairo_arc (cr, width / 2.0, height / 2.0, MIN (width, height) / 2.0, 0, 2 * G_PI); gtk_style_context_get_color (context, &color); gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba (cr, &color); cairo_fill (cr); } int main (int argc, char **argv) { gtk_init (); GtkWidget *area = gtk_drawing_area_new (); gtk_drawing_area_set_content_width (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100); gtk_drawing_area_set_content_height (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), 100); gtk_drawing_area_set_draw_func (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (area), draw_function, NULL, NULL); return 0; }The draw function is normally called when a drawing area first comes onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered. You can also force a redraw by adding to the “damage region” of the drawing area’s window using [method
Gtk.Widget.queue_draw]. This will cause the drawing area to call the draw function again.The available routines for drawing are documented on the GDK Drawing Primitives page and the cairo documentation.
To receive mouse events on a drawing area, you will need to use event controllers. To receive keyboard events, you will need to set the “can-focus” property on the drawing area, and you should probably draw some user-visible indication that the drawing area is focused.
If you need more complex control over your widget, you should consider creating your own
GtkWidgetsubclass.The
See moreDrawingAreaProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDrawingAreainstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDrawingArea. Alternatively, useDrawingAreaRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DrawingAreaProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkATContextis an abstract class provided by GTK to communicate to platform-specific assistive technologies API.Each platform supported by GTK implements a
GtkATContextsubclass, and is responsible for updating the accessible state in response to state changes inGtkAccessible.The
See moreATContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkATContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeATContext. Alternatively, useATContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ATContextProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
The
GtkAboutDialogoffers a simple way to display information about a program.The shown information includes the programs’ logo, name, copyright, website and license. It is also possible to give credits to the authors, documenters, translators and artists who have worked on the program.
An about dialog is typically opened when the user selects the
Aboutoption from theHelpmenu. All parts of the dialog are optional.
About dialogs often contain links and email addresses.
GtkAboutDialogdisplays these as clickable links. By default, it calls [funcGtk.show_uri] when a user clicks one. The behaviour can be overridden with the [signalGtk.AboutDialog::activate-link] signal.To specify a person with an email address, use a string like
Edgar Allan Poe <edgarpoe.com>. To specify a website with a title, use a string likeGTK team https://www.gtk.org.To make constructing a
GtkAboutDialogas convenient as possible, you can use the function [funcGtk.show_about_dialog] which constructs and shows a dialog and keeps it around so that it can be shown again.Note that GTK sets a default title of
_("About %s")on the dialog window (wheresis replaced by the name of the application, but in order to ensure proper translation of the title, applications should set the title property explicitly when constructing aGtkAboutDialog, as shown in the following example:GFile *logo_file = g_file_new_for_path ("./logo.png"); GdkTexture *example_logo = gdk_texture_new_from_file (logo_file, NULL); g_object_unref (logo_file); gtk_show_about_dialog (NULL, "program-name", "ExampleCode", "logo", example_logo, "title", `_("About ExampleCode")`, NULL);CSS nodes
GtkAboutDialoghas a single CSS node with the namewindowand style class.aboutdialog.The
See moreAboutDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAboutDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAboutDialog. Alternatively, useAboutDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AboutDialogProtocol : WindowProtocol
-
GtkActionBaris designed to present contextual actions.
It is expected to be displayed below the content and expand horizontally to fill the area.
It allows placing children at the start or the end. In addition, it contains an internal centered box which is centered with respect to the full width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.
CSS nodes
actionbar ╰── revealer ╰── box ├── box.start │ ╰── [start children] ├── [center widget] ╰── box.end ╰── [end children]A
GtkActionBar‘s CSS node is calledactionbar. It contains arevealersubnode, which contains aboxsubnode, which contains twoboxsubnodes at the start and end of the action bar, withstartand `end style classes respectively, as well as a center node that represents the center child.Each of the boxes contains children packed for that side.
The
See moreActionBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkActionBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeActionBar. Alternatively, useActionBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ActionBarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutActionthat callsgtk_widget_activate().The
See moreActivateActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkActivateActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeActivateAction. Alternatively, useActivateActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ActivateActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
GtkAdjustmentis a model for a numeric value.The `GtkAdjustment has an associated lower and upper bound. It also contains step and page increments, and a page size.
Adjustments are used within several GTK widgets, including [class
Gtk.SpinButton], [classGtk.Viewport], [classGtk.Scrollbar] and [classGtk.Scale].The
GtkAdjustmentobject does not update the value itself. Instead it is left up to the owner of theGtkAdjustmentto control the value.The
See moreAdjustmentProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAdjustmentinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAdjustment. Alternatively, useAdjustmentRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AdjustmentProtocol : InitiallyUnownedProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutTriggerthat combines two triggers.The
GtkAlternativeTriggertriggers when either of two trigger.This can be cascaded to combine more than two triggers.
The
See moreAlternativeTriggerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAlternativeTriggerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAlternativeTrigger. Alternatively, useAlternativeTriggerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AlternativeTriggerProtocol : ShortcutTriggerProtocol
-
GtkAnyFiltermatches an item when at least one of its filters matches.To add filters to a
GtkAnyFilter, use [methodGtk.MultiFilter.append].The
See moreAnyFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAnyFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAnyFilter. Alternatively, useAnyFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AnyFilterProtocol : MultiFilterProtocol
-
The
GtkAppChooserButtonlets the user select an application.
Initially, a
GtkAppChooserButtonselects the first application in its list, which will either be the most-recently used application or, if [propertyGtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item] istrue, the default application.The list of applications shown in a
GtkAppChooserButtonincludes the recommended applications for the given content type. When [propertyGtk.AppChooserButton:show-default-item] is set, the default application is also included. To let the user chooser other applications, you can set the [propertyGtk.AppChooserButton:show-dialog-item] property, which allows to open a full [classGtk.AppChooserDialog].It is possible to add custom items to the list, using [method
Gtk.AppChooserButton.append_custom_item]. These items cause the [signalGtk.AppChooserButton::custom-item-activated] signal to be emitted when they are selected.To track changes in the selected application, use the [signal
Gtk.AppChooserButton::changed] signal.CSS nodes
GtkAppChooserButtonhas a single CSS node with the name “appchooserbutton”.The
See moreAppChooserButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAppChooserButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAppChooserButton. Alternatively, useAppChooserButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AppChooserButtonProtocol : AppChooserProtocol
-
GtkAppChooserDialogshows aGtkAppChooserWidgetinside aGtkDialog.
Note that
GtkAppChooserDialogdoes not have any interesting methods of its own. Instead, you should get the embeddedGtkAppChooserWidgetusing [methodGtk.AppChooserDialog.get_widget] and call its methods if the generic [ifaceGtk.AppChooser] interface is not sufficient for your needs.To set the heading that is shown above the
GtkAppChooserWidget, use [methodGtk.AppChooserDialog.set_heading].The
See moreAppChooserDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAppChooserDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAppChooserDialog. Alternatively, useAppChooserDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AppChooserDialogProtocol : AppChooserProtocol, DialogProtocol
-
GtkAppChooserWidgetis a widget for selecting applications.It is the main building block for [class
Gtk.AppChooserDialog]. Most applications only need to use the latter; but you can use this widget as part of a larger widget if you have special needs.GtkAppChooserWidgetoffers detailed control over what applications are shown, using the [propertyGtk.AppChooserWidget:show-default], [propertyGtk.AppChooserWidget:show-recommended], [propertyGtk.AppChooserWidget:show-fallback], [propertyGtk.AppChooserWidget:show-other] and [propertyGtk.AppChooserWidget:show-all] properties. See the [ifaceGtk.AppChooser] documentation for more information about these groups of applications.To keep track of the selected application, use the [signal
Gtk.AppChooserWidget::application-selected] and [signalGtk.AppChooserWidget::application-activated] signals.CSS nodes
GtkAppChooserWidgethas a single CSS node with name appchooser.The
See moreAppChooserWidgetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAppChooserWidgetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAppChooserWidget. Alternatively, useAppChooserWidgetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AppChooserWidgetProtocol : AppChooserProtocol
-
GtkApplicationWindowis aGtkWindowsubclass that integrates withGtkApplication.Notably,
GtkApplicationWindowcan handle an application menubar.This class implements the
GActionGroupandGActionMapinterfaces, to let you add window-specific actions that will be exported by the associated [classGtk.Application], together with its application-wide actions. Window-specific actions are prefixed with the “win.” prefix and application-wide actions are prefixed with the “app.” prefix. Actions must be addressed with the prefixed name when referring to them from aGMenuModel.Note that widgets that are placed inside a
GtkApplicationWindowcan also activate these actions, if they implement the [ifaceGtk.Actionable] interface.The settings [property
Gtk.Settings:gtk-shell-shows-app-menu] and [propertyGtk.Settings:gtk-shell-shows-menubar] tell GTK whether the desktop environment is showing the application menu and menubar models outside the application as part of the desktop shell. For instance, on OS X, both menus will be displayed remotely; on Windows neither will be.If the desktop environment does not display the menubar, then
GtkApplicationWindowwill automatically show a menubar for it. This behaviour can be overridden with the [propertyGtk.ApplicationWindow:show-menubar] property. If the desktop environment does not display the application menu, then it will automatically be included in the menubar or in the windows client-side decorations.See [class
Gtk.PopoverMenu] for information about the XML language used byGtkBuilderfor menu models.See also: [method
Gtk.Application.set_menubar].A GtkApplicationWindow with a menubar
The code sample below shows how to set up a
GtkApplicationWindowwith a menu bar defined on the [classGtk.Application]:GtkApplication *app = gtk_application_new ("org.gtk.test", 0); GtkBuilder *builder = gtk_builder_new_from_string ( "<interface>" " <menu id='menubar'>" " <submenu>" " <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Edit</attribute>" " <item>" " <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Copy</attribute>" " <attribute name='action'>win.copy</attribute>" " </item>" " <item>" " <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Paste</attribute>" " <attribute name='action'>win.paste</attribute>" " </item>" " </submenu>" " </menu>" "</interface>", -1); GMenuModel *menubar = G_MENU_MODEL (gtk_builder_get_object (builder, "menubar")); gtk_application_set_menubar (GTK_APPLICATION (app), menubar); g_object_unref (builder); // ... GtkWidget *window = gtk_application_window_new (app);The
See moreApplicationWindowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkApplicationWindowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeApplicationWindow. Alternatively, useApplicationWindowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ApplicationWindowProtocol : ActionGroupProtocol, ActionMapProtocol, WindowProtocol
-
GtkAspectFramepreserves the aspect ratio of its child.The frame can respect the aspect ratio of the child widget, or use its own aspect ratio.
CSS nodes
GtkAspectFrameuses a CSS node with nameframe.The
See moreAspectFrameProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAspectFrameinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAspectFrame. Alternatively, useAspectFrameRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AspectFrameProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkAssistantis used to represent a complex as a series of steps.
Each step consists of one or more pages.
GtkAssistantguides the user through the pages, and controls the page flow to collect the data needed for the operation.GtkAssistanthandles which buttons to show and to make sensitive based on page sequence knowledge and the [enumGtk.AssistantPageType] of each page in addition to state information like the completed and committed page statuses.If you have a case that doesn’t quite fit in
GtkAssistants way of handling buttons, you can use theGTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOMpage type and handle buttons yourself.GtkAssistantmaintains aGtkAssistantPageobject for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain theGtkAssistantPagefor a child with [methodGtk.Assistant.get_page].GtkAssistant as GtkBuildable
The
GtkAssistantimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface exposes theaction_areaas internal children with the name “action_area”.To add pages to an assistant in
GtkBuilder, simply add it as a child to theGtkAssistantobject. If you need to set per-object properties, create aGtkAssistantPageobject explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it.CSS nodes
GtkAssistanthas a single CSS node with the name window and style class .assistant.The
See moreAssistantProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAssistantinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAssistant. Alternatively, useAssistantRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AssistantProtocol : WindowProtocol
-
GtkAssistantPageis an auxiliary object used by `GtkAssistant.The
See moreAssistantPageProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAssistantPageinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAssistantPage. Alternatively, useAssistantPageRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AssistantPageProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkBinLayoutis aGtkLayoutManagersubclass useful for create “bins” of widgets.GtkBinLayoutwill stack each child of a widget on top of each other, using the [propertyGtk.Widget:hexpand], [propertyGtk.Widget:vexpand], [propertyGtk.Widget:halign], and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties of each child to determine where they should be positioned.The
See moreBinLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBinLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBinLayout. Alternatively, useBinLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BinLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
The
See moreATContextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkATContextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeATContextClass. Alternatively, useATContextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ATContextClassProtocol
-
The
See moreAccessibleInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAccessibleInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAccessibleInterface. Alternatively, useAccessibleInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AccessibleInterfaceProtocol
-
The interface vtable for
GtkActionable.The
See moreActionableInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkActionableInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeActionableInterface. Alternatively, useActionableInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ActionableInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreActivateActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkActivateActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeActivateActionClass. Alternatively, useActivateActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ActivateActionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreAdjustmentClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAdjustmentClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAdjustmentClass. Alternatively, useAdjustmentClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AdjustmentClassProtocol
-
The
See moreAlternativeTriggerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAlternativeTriggerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAlternativeTriggerClass. Alternatively, useAlternativeTriggerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AlternativeTriggerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreAnyFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAnyFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAnyFilterClass. Alternatively, useAnyFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AnyFilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreApplicationClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkApplicationClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeApplicationClass. Alternatively, useApplicationClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ApplicationClassProtocol
-
The
See moreApplicationWindowClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkApplicationWindowClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeApplicationWindowClass. Alternatively, useApplicationWindowClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ApplicationWindowClassProtocol
-
The
See moreBinLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBinLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBinLayoutClass. Alternatively, useBinLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BinLayoutClassProtocol
-
GtkAccessibleis an interface for describing UI elements for Assistive Technologies.Every accessible implementation has:
- a “role”, represented by a value of the [enum
Gtk.AccessibleRole] enumeration - an “attribute”, represented by a set of [enum
Gtk.AccessibleState], [enumGtk.AccessibleProperty] and [enumGtk.AccessibleRelation] values
The role cannot be changed after instantiating a
GtkAccessibleimplementation.The attributes are updated every time a UI element’s state changes in a way that should be reflected by assistive technologies. For instance, if a
GtkWidgetvisibility changes, theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_HIDDENstate will also change to reflect the [propertyGtk.Widget:visible] property.The
See moreAccessibleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAccessibleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAccessible. Alternatively, useAccessibleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AccessibleProtocol - a “role”, represented by a value of the [enum
-
The
GtkActionableinterface provides a convenient way of asscociating widgets with actions.It primarily consists of two properties: [property
Gtk.Actionable:action-name] and [propertyGtk.Actionable:action-target]. There are also some convenience APIs for setting these properties.The action will be looked up in action groups that are found among the widgets ancestors. Most commonly, these will be the actions with the “win.” or “app.” prefix that are associated with the
GtkApplicationWindoworGtkApplication, but other action groups that are added with [methodGtk.Widget.insert_action_group] will be consulted as well.The
See moreActionableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkActionableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeActionable. Alternatively, useActionableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ActionableProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkAppChooseris an interface for widgets which allow the user to choose an application.The main objects that implement this interface are [class
Gtk.AppChooserWidget], [classGtk.AppChooserDialog] and [classGtk.AppChooserButton].Applications are represented by GIO
GAppInfoobjects here. GIO has a concept of recommended and fallback applications for a given content type. Recommended applications are those that claim to handle the content type itself, while fallback also includes applications that handle a more generic content type. GIO also knows the default and last-used application for a given content type. TheGtkAppChooserWidgetprovides detailed control over whether the shown list of applications should include default, recommended or fallback applications.To obtain the application that has been selected in a
GtkAppChooser, use [methodGtk.AppChooser.get_app_info].The
See moreAppChooserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkAppChooserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeAppChooser. Alternatively, useAppChooserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol AppChooserProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkBuildableallows objects to extend and customize their deserialization from ui files.The interface includes methods for setting names and properties of objects, parsing custom tags and constructing child objects.
The
GtkBuildableinterface is implemented by all widgets and many of the non-widget objects that are provided by GTK. The main user of this interface is [classGtk.Builder]. There should be very little need for applications to call any of these functions directly.An object only needs to implement this interface if it needs to extend the
GtkBuilderXML format or run any extra routines at deserialization time.The
See moreBuildableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuildableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuildable. Alternatively, useBuildableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuildableProtocol
-
A
GtkBitsetrepresents a set of unsigned integers.Another name for this data structure is “bitmap”.
The current implementation is based on roaring bitmaps.
A bitset allows adding a set of integers and provides support for set operations like unions, intersections and checks for equality or if a value is contained in the set.
GtkBitsetalso contains various functions to query metadata about the bitset, such as the minimum or maximum values or its size.The fastest way to iterate values in a bitset is [struct
Gtk.BitsetIter].The main use case for
GtkBitsetis implementing complex selections for [ifaceGtk.SelectionModel].The
See moreBitsetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBitsetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBitset. Alternatively, useBitsetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BitsetProtocol
-
An opaque, stack-allocated struct for iterating over the elements of a
GtkBitset.Before a
GtkBitsetItercan be used, it needs to be initialized with [funcGtk.BitsetIter.init_first], [funcGtk.BitsetIter.init_last] or [funcGtk.BitsetIter.init_at].The
See moreBitsetIterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBitsetIterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBitsetIter. Alternatively, useBitsetIterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BitsetIterProtocol
-
The
See moreBookmarkListClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBookmarkListClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBookmarkListClass. Alternatively, useBookmarkListClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BookmarkListClassProtocol
-
The
See moreBoolFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoolFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBoolFilterClass. Alternatively, useBoolFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoolFilterClassProtocol
-
A struct that specifies a border around a rectangular area.
Each side can have different width.
The
See moreBorderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBorderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBorder. Alternatively, useBorderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BorderProtocol
-
The
See moreBoxClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoxClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBoxClass. Alternatively, useBoxClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoxClassProtocol
-
The
See moreBoxLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoxLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBoxLayoutClass. Alternatively, useBoxLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoxLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
GtkBuildableIfaceinterface contains methods that are necessary to allowGtkBuilderto construct an object from aGtkBuilderUI definition.The
See moreBuildableIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuildableIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuildableIface. Alternatively, useBuildableIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuildableIfaceProtocol
-
An opaque context struct for
GtkBuildableParser.The
See moreBuildableParseContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuildableParseContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuildableParseContext. Alternatively, useBuildableParseContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuildableParseContextProtocol
-
A sub-parser for
GtkBuildableimplementations.The
See moreBuildableParserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuildableParserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuildableParser. Alternatively, useBuildableParserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuildableParserProtocol
-
The
See moreBuilderCScopeClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderCScopeClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderCScopeClass. Alternatively, useBuilderCScopeClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderCScopeClassProtocol
-
The
See moreBuilderClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderClass. Alternatively, useBuilderClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderClassProtocol
-
The
See moreBuilderListItemFactoryClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderListItemFactoryClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderListItemFactoryClass. Alternatively, useBuilderListItemFactoryClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderListItemFactoryClassProtocol
-
The virtual function table to implement for
GtkBuilderScopeimplementations. Default implementations for each function do exist, but they usually just fail, so it is suggested that implementations implement all of them.The
See moreBuilderScopeInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderScopeInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderScopeInterface. Alternatively, useBuilderScopeInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderScopeInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreButtonClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkButtonClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeButtonClass. Alternatively, useButtonClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ButtonClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCallbackActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCallbackActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCallbackActionClass. Alternatively, useCallbackActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CallbackActionClassProtocol
-
GtkBookmarkListis a list model that wrapsGBookmarkFile.It presents a
GListModeland fills it asynchronously with theGFileInfos returned from that function.The
GFileInfos in the list have some attributes in the recent namespace added:recentprivate`(boolean) andrecent:applications` (stringv).The
See moreBookmarkListProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBookmarkListinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBookmarkList. Alternatively, useBookmarkListRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BookmarkListProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkBoolFilterevaluates a booleanGtkExpressionto determine whether to include items.The
See moreBoolFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoolFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBoolFilter. Alternatively, useBoolFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoolFilterProtocol : FilterProtocol
-
GtkBoxLayoutis a layout manager that arranges children in a single row or column.Whether it is a row or column depends on the value of its [property
Gtk.Orientable:orientation] property. Within the other dimension all children all allocated the same size. TheGtkBoxLayoutwill respect the [propertyGtk.Widget:halign] and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties of each child widget.If you want all children to be assigned the same size, you can use the [property
Gtk.BoxLayout:homogeneous] property.If you want to specify the amount of space placed between each child, you can use the [property
Gtk.BoxLayout:spacing] property.The
See moreBoxLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBoxLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBoxLayout. Alternatively, useBoxLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BoxLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol, OrientableProtocol
-
A
GtkBuilderreads XML descriptions of a user interface and instantiates the described objects.To create a
GtkBuilderfrom a user interface description, call [ctorGtk.Builder.new_from_file], [ctorGtk.Builder.new_from_resource] or [ctorGtk.Builder.new_from_string].In the (unusual) case that you want to add user interface descriptions from multiple sources to the same
GtkBuilderyou can call [ctorGtk.Builder.new] to get an empty builder and populate it by (multiple) calls to [methodGtk.Builder.add_from_file], [methodGtk.Builder.add_from_resource] or [methodGtk.Builder.add_from_string].A
GtkBuilderholds a reference to all objects that it has constructed and drops these references when it is finalized. This finalization can cause the destruction of non-widget objects or widgets which are not contained in a toplevel window. For toplevel windows constructed by a builder, it is the responsibility of the user to call [methodGtk.Window.destroy] to get rid of them and all the widgets they contain.The functions [method
Gtk.Builder.get_object] and [methodGtk.Builder.get_objects] can be used to access the widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description. Toplevel windows returned by these functions will stay around until the user explicitly destroys them with [methodGtk.Window.destroy]. Other widgets will either be part of a larger hierarchy constructed by the builder (in which case you should not have to worry about their lifecycle), or without a parent, in which case they have to be added to some container to make use of them. Non-widget objects need to be reffed withg_object_ref()to keep them beyond the lifespan of the builder.GtkBuilder UI Definitions
GtkBuilderparses textual descriptions of user interfaces which are specified in XML format. We refer to these descriptions as “GtkBuilder UI definitions” or just “UI definitions” if the context is clear.The toplevel element is
<interface>. It optionally takes a “domain” attribute, which will make the builder look for translated strings usingdgettext()in the domain specified. This can also be done by calling [methodGtk.Builder.set_translation_domain] on the builder.Objects are described by
<object>elements, which can contain<property>elements to set properties,<signal>elements which connect signals to handlers, and<child>elements, which describe child objects (most often widgets inside a container, but also e.g. actions in an action group, or columns in a tree model). A<child>element contains an<object>element which describes the child object.The target toolkit
version(s)are described by<requires>elements, the “lib” attribute specifies the widget library in question (currently the only supported value is “gtk”) and the “version” attribute specifies the target version in the form “<major>.<minor>”.GtkBuilderwill error out if the version requirements are not met.Typically, the specific kind of object represented by an
<object>element is specified by the “class” attribute. If the type has not been loaded yet, GTK tries to find theget_type()function from the class name by applying heuristics. This works in most cases, but if necessary, it is possible to specify the name of theget_type()function explicitly with the “type-func” attribute.Objects may be given a name with the “id” attribute, which allows the application to retrieve them from the builder with [method
Gtk.Builder.get_object]. An id is also necessary to use the object as property value in other parts of the UI definition. GTK reserves ids starting and ending with___(three consecutive underscores) for its own purposes.Setting properties of objects is pretty straightforward with the
<property>element: the “name” attribute specifies the name of the property, and the content of the element specifies the value. If the “translatable” attribute is set to a true value, GTK usesgettext()(ordgettext()if the builder has a translation domain set) to find a translation for the value. This happens before the value is parsed, so it can be used for properties of any type, but it is probably most useful for string properties. It is also possible to specify a context to disambiguate short strings, and comments which may help the translators.GtkBuildercan parse textual representations for the most common property types: characters, strings, integers, floating-point numbers, booleans (strings like “TRUE”, “t”, “yes”, “y”, “1” are interpreted astrue, strings like “FALSE”, “f”, “no”, “n”, “0” are interpreted asfalse), enumerations (can be specified by their name, nick or integer value), flags (can be specified by their name, nick, integer value, optionally combined with “|”, e.g. “GTK_INPUT_HINT_EMOJI|GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE”) and colors (in a format understood by [methodGdk.RGBA.parse]).GVariants can be specified in the format understood byg_variant_parse(), and pixbufs can be specified as a filename of an image file to load.Objects can be referred to by their name and by default refer to objects declared in the local XML fragment and objects exposed via [method
Gtk.Builder.expose_object]. In general,GtkBuilderallows forward references to objects — declared in the local XML; an object doesn’t have to be constructed before it can be referred to. The exception to this rule is that an object has to be constructed before it can be used as the value of a construct-only property.It is also possible to bind a property value to another object’s property value using the attributes “bind-source” to specify the source object of the binding, and optionally, “bind-property” and “bind-flags” to specify the source property and source binding flags respectively. Internally,
GtkBuilderimplements this usingGBindingobjects. For more information seeg_object_bind_property().Sometimes it is necessary to refer to widgets which have implicitly been constructed by GTK as part of a composite widget, to set properties on them or to add further children (e.g. the content area of a
GtkDialog). This can be achieved by setting the “internal-child” property of the<child>element to a true value. Note thatGtkBuilderstill requires an<object>element for the internal child, even if it has already been constructed.A number of widgets have different places where a child can be added (e.g. tabs vs. page content in notebooks). This can be reflected in a UI definition by specifying the “type” attribute on a
<child>The possible values for the “type” attribute are described in the sections describing the widget-specific portions of UI definitions.Signal handlers and function pointers
Signal handlers are set up with the
<signal>element. The “name” attribute specifies the name of the signal, and the “handler” attribute specifies the function to connect to the signal. The remaining attributes, “after”, “swapped” and “object”, have the same meaning as the corresponding parameters of theg_signal_connect_object()org_signal_connect_data()functions. A “last_modification_time” attribute is also allowed, but it does not have a meaning to the builder.If you rely on
GModulesupport to lookup callbacks in the symbol table, the following details should be noted:When compiling applications for Windows, you must declare signal callbacks with
G_MODULE_EXPORT, or they will not be put in the symbol table. On Linux and Unix, this is not necessary; applications should instead be compiled with the -Wl,–export-dynamicCFLAGS, and linked againstgmodule-export-2.0.A GtkBuilder UI Definition
<interface> <object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1"> <child internal-child="content_area"> <object class="GtkBox" id="vbox1"> <child internal-child="action_area"> <object class="GtkBox" id="hbuttonbox1"> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="ok_button"> <property name="label" translatable="yes">_Ok</property> <property name="use-underline">True</property> <signal name="clicked" handler="ok_button_clicked"/> </object> </child> </object> </child> </object> </child> </object> </interface>Beyond this general structure, several object classes define their own XML DTD fragments for filling in the ANY placeholders in the DTD above. Note that a custom element in a <child> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the parent object, while a custom element in an <object> element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the object.
These XML fragments are explained in the documentation of the respective objects.
A
<template>tag can be used to define a widget class’s components. See the GtkWidget documentation for details.The
See moreBuilderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilder. Alternatively, useBuilderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkBuilderScopeimplementation for the C language.GtkBuilderCScopeinstances use symbols explicitly added tobuilderwith prior calls to [methodGtk.BuilderCScope.add_callback_symbol]. If developers want to do that, they are encouraged to create their own scopes for that purpose.In the case that symbols are not explicitly added; GTK will uses
GModule’s introspective features (by opening the modulenil) to look at the application’s symbol table. From here it tries to match the signal function names given in the interface description with symbols in the application.Note that unless [method
Gtk.BuilderCScope.add_callback_symbol] is called for all signal callbacks which are referenced by the loaded XML, this functionality will require thatGModulebe supported on the platform.The
See moreBuilderCScopeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderCScopeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderCScope. Alternatively, useBuilderCScopeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderCScopeProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuilderScopeProtocol
-
GtkBuilderListItemFactoryis aGtkListItemFactorythat creates widgets by instantiatingGtkBuilderUI templates.The templates must be extending
GtkListItem, and typically useGtkExpressions to obtain data from the items in the model.Example:
<interface> <template class="GtkListItem"> <property name="child"> <object class="GtkLabel"> <property name="xalign">0</property> <binding name="label"> <lookup name="name" type="SettingsKey"> <lookup name="item">GtkListItem</lookup> </lookup> </binding> </object> </property> </template> </interface>The
See moreBuilderListItemFactoryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderListItemFactoryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderListItemFactory. Alternatively, useBuilderListItemFactoryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderListItemFactoryProtocol : ListItemFactoryProtocol
-
The
GtkButtonwidget is generally used to trigger a callback function that is called when the button is pressed.
The
GtkButtonwidget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it can hold almost any other standardGtkWidget. The most commonly used child is theGtkLabel.CSS nodes
GtkButtonhas a single CSS node with name button. The node will get the style classes .image-button or .text-button, if the content is just an image or label, respectively. It may also receive the .flat style class. When activating a button via the keyboard, the button will temporarily gain the .keyboard-activating style class.Other style classes that are commonly used with
GtkButtoninclude .suggested-action and .destructive-action. In special cases, buttons can be made round by adding the .circular style class.Button-like widgets like [class
Gtk.ToggleButton], [classGtk.MenuButton], [classGtk.VolumeButton], [classGtk.LockButton], [classGtk.ColorButton] or [classGtk.FontButton] use style classes such as .toggle, .popup, .scale, .lock, .color on the button node to differentiate themselves from a plainGtkButton.Accessibility
GtkButtonuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTONrole.The
See moreButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeButton. Alternatively, useButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ButtonProtocol : ActionableProtocol
-
A variant of
GtkClosureExpressionusing a C closure.The
See moreCClosureExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCClosureExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCClosureExpression. Alternatively, useCClosureExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CClosureExpressionProtocol : ExpressionProtocol
-
GtkBuilderScopeis an interface to provide language binding support toGtkBuilder.The goal of
GtkBuilderScopeis to look up programming-language-specific values for strings that are given in aGtkBuilderUI file.The primary intended audience is bindings that want to provide deeper integration of
GtkBuilderinto the language.A
GtkBuilderScopeinstance may be used with multipleGtkBuilderobjects, even at once.By default, GTK will use its own implementation of
GtkBuilderScopefor the C language which can be created via [ctorGtk.BuilderCScope.new].The
See moreBuilderScopeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkBuilderScopeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeBuilderScope. Alternatively, useBuilderScopeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol BuilderScopeProtocol
-
Interface for widgets that can be used for editing cells
The
GtkCellEditableinterface must be implemented for widgets to be usable to edit the contents of aGtkTreeViewcell. It provides a way to specify how temporary widgets should be configured for editing, get the new value, etc.The
See moreCellEditableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellEditableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellEditable. Alternatively, useCellEditableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellEditableProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkCalendaris a widget that displays a Gregorian calendar, one month at a time.
A
GtkCalendarcan be created with [ctorGtk.Calendar.new].The date that is currently displayed can be altered with [method
Gtk.Calendar.select_day].To place a visual marker on a particular day, use [method
Gtk.Calendar.mark_day] and to remove the marker, [methodGtk.Calendar.unmark_day]. Alternative, all marks can be cleared with [methodGtk.Calendar.clear_marks].The selected date can be retrieved from a
GtkCalendarusing [methodGtk.Calendar.get_date].Users should be aware that, although the Gregorian calendar is the legal calendar in most countries, it was adopted progressively between 1582 and 1929. Display before these dates is likely to be historically incorrect.
CSS nodes
calendar.view ├── header │ ├── button │ ├── stack.month │ ├── button │ ├── button │ ├── label.year │ ╰── button ╰── grid ╰── label[.day-name][.week-number][.day-number][.other-month][.today]GtkCalendarhas a main node with name calendar. It contains a subnode called header containing the widgets for switching between years and months.The grid subnode contains all day labels, including week numbers on the left (marked with the .week-number css class) and day names on top (marked with the .day-name css class).
Day labels that belong to the previous or next month get the .other-month style class. The label of the current day get the .today style class.
Marked day labels get the :selected state assigned.
The
See moreCalendarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCalendarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCalendar. Alternatively, useCalendarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CalendarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutActionthat invokes a callback.The
See moreCallbackActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCallbackActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCallbackAction. Alternatively, useCallbackActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CallbackActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
An abstract class for laying out GtkCellRenderers
The
GtkCellAreais an abstract class forGtkCellLayoutwidgets (also referred to as “layouting widgets”) to interface with an arbitrary number ofGtkCellRenderers and interact with the user for a givenGtkTreeModelrow.The cell area handles events, focus navigation, drawing and size requests and allocations for a given row of data.
Usually users dont have to interact with the
GtkCellAreadirectly unless they are implementing a cell-layouting widget themselves.Requesting area sizes
As outlined in GtkWidget’s geometry management section, GTK uses a height-for-width geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user interfaces.
GtkCellAreauses the same semantics to calculate the size of an area for an arbitrary number ofGtkTreeModelrows.When requesting the size of a cell area one needs to calculate the size for a handful of rows, and this will be done differently by different layouting widgets. For instance a
GtkTreeViewColumnalways lines up the areas from top to bottom while aGtkIconViewon the other hand might enforce that all areas received the same width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell areas when allocated less width.It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of cells are different in each row). For this reason the
GtkCellAreauses aGtkCellAreaContext object to store the alignments and sizes along the way (as well as the overall largest minimum and natural size for all the rows which have been calculated with the said context).The
GtkCellAreaContext is an opaque object specific to theGtkCellAreawhich created it (seegtk_cell_area_create_context()). The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically), However, it’s important that the sameGtkCellAreaContext which was used to request the sizes for a givenGtkTreeModelrow be used when rendering or processing events for that row.In order to request the width of all the rows at the root level of a
GtkTreeModelone would do the following:(C Language Example):
GtkTreeIter iter; int minimum_width; int natural_width; valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter); while (valid) { gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE); gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width (area, context, widget, NULL, NULL); valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter); } gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (context, &minimum_width, &natural_width);Note that in this example it’s not important to observe the returned minimum and natural width of the area for each row unless the cell-layouting object is actually interested in the widths of individual rows. The overall width is however stored in the accompanying
GtkCellAreaContext object and can be consulted at any time.This can be useful since
GtkCellLayoutwidgets usually have to support requesting and rendering rows in treemodels with an exceedingly large amount of rows. TheGtkCellLayoutwidget in that case would calculate the required width of the rows in an idle or timeout source (seeg_timeout_add()) and when the widget is requested its actual width in [vfuncGtk.Widget.measure] it can simply consult the width accumulated so far in theGtkCellAreaContext object.A simple example where rows are rendered from top to bottom and take up the full width of the layouting widget would look like:
(C Language Example):
static void foo_get_preferred_width (GtkWidget *widget, int *minimum_size, int *natural_size) { Foo *foo = FOO (widget); FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv; foo_ensure_at_least_one_handfull_of_rows_have_been_requested (foo); gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (priv->context, minimum_size, natural_size); }In the above example the Foo widget has to make sure that some row sizes have been calculated (the amount of rows that Foo judged was appropriate to request space for in a single timeout iteration) before simply returning the amount of space required by the area via the
GtkCellAreaContext.Requesting the height for width (or width for height) of an area is a similar task except in this case the
GtkCellAreaContext does not store the data (actually, it does not know how much space the layouting widget plans to allocate it for every row. It’s up to the layouting widget to render each row of data with the appropriate height and width which was requested by theGtkCellArea).In order to request the height for width of all the rows at the root level of a
GtkTreeModelone would do the following:(C Language Example):
GtkTreeIter iter; int minimum_height; int natural_height; int full_minimum_height = 0; int full_natural_height = 0; valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter); while (valid) { gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE); gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width (area, context, widget, width, &minimum_height, &natural_height); if (width_is_for_allocation) cache_row_height (&iter, minimum_height, natural_height); full_minimum_height += minimum_height; full_natural_height += natural_height; valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter); }Note that in the above example we would need to cache the heights returned for each row so that we would know what sizes to render the areas for each row. However we would only want to really cache the heights if the request is intended for the layouting widgets real allocation.
In some cases the layouting widget is requested the height for an arbitrary for_width, this is a special case for layouting widgets who need to request size for tens of thousands of rows. For this case it’s only important that the layouting widget calculate one reasonably sized chunk of rows and return that height synchronously. The reasoning here is that any layouting widget is at least capable of synchronously calculating enough height to fill the screen height (or scrolled window height) in response to a single call to [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.measure]. Returning a perfect height for width that is larger than the screen area is inconsequential since after the layouting receives an allocation from a scrolled window it simply continues to drive the scrollbar values while more and more height is required for the row heights that are calculated in the background.Rendering Areas
Once area sizes have been acquired at least for the rows in the visible area of the layouting widget they can be rendered at [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.snapshot] time.A crude example of how to render all the rows at the root level runs as follows:
(C Language Example):
GtkAllocation allocation; GdkRectangle cell_area = { 0, }; GtkTreeIter iter; int minimum_width; int natural_width; gtk_widget_get_allocation (widget, &allocation); cell_area.width = allocation.width; valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter); while (valid) { cell_area.height = get_cached_height_for_row (&iter); gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE); gtk_cell_area_render (area, context, widget, cr, &cell_area, &cell_area, state_flags, FALSE); cell_area.y += cell_area.height; valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter); }Note that the cached height in this example really depends on how the layouting widget works. The layouting widget might decide to give every row its minimum or natural height or, if the model content is expected to fit inside the layouting widget without scrolling, it would make sense to calculate the allocation for each row at the time the widget is allocated using
gtk_distribute_natural_allocation().Handling Events and Driving Keyboard Focus
Passing events to the area is as simple as handling events on any normal widget and then passing them to the
gtk_cell_area_event()API as they come in. UsuallyGtkCellAreais only interested in button events, however some customized derived areas can be implemented who are interested in handling other events. Handling an event can trigger theGtkCellAreafocus-changedsignal to fire; as well asGtkCellAreaadd-editablein the case that an editable cell was clicked and needs to start editing. You can callgtk_cell_area_stop_editing()at any time to cancel any cell editing that is currently in progress.The
GtkCellAreadrives keyboard focus from cell to cell in a way similar toGtkWidget. For layouting widgets that support giving focus to cells it’s important to remember to passGTK_CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSEDto the area functions for the row that has focus and to tell the area to paint the focus at render time.Layouting widgets that accept focus on cells should implement the [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.focus] virtual method. The layouting widget is always responsible for knowing whereGtkTreeModelrows are rendered inside the widget, so at [vfuncGtk.Widget.focus] time the layouting widget should use theGtkCellAreamethods to navigate focus inside the area and then observe the GtkDirectionType to pass the focus to adjacent rows and areas.A basic example of how the [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.focus] virtual method should be implemented:(C Language Example):
static gboolean foo_focus (GtkWidget *widget, GtkDirectionType direction) { Foo *foo = FOO (widget); FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv; int focus_row; gboolean have_focus = FALSE; focus_row = priv->focus_row; if (!gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)) gtk_widget_grab_focus (widget); valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, priv->focus_row); while (valid) { gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (priv->area, priv->model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE); if (gtk_cell_area_focus (priv->area, direction)) { priv->focus_row = focus_row; have_focus = TRUE; break; } else { if (direction == GTK_DIR_RIGHT || direction == GTK_DIR_LEFT) break; else if (direction == GTK_DIR_UP || direction == GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD) { if (focus_row == 0) break; else { focus_row--; valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, focus_row); } } else { if (focus_row == last_row) break; else { focus_row++; valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (priv->model, &iter); } } } } return have_focus; }Note that the layouting widget is responsible for matching the GtkDirectionType values to the way it lays out its cells.
Cell Properties
The
GtkCellAreaintroduces cell properties forGtkCellRenderers. This provides some general interfaces for defining the relationship cell areas have with their cells. For instance in aGtkCellAreaBox a cell might “expand” and receive extra space when the area is allocated more than its full natural request, or a cell might be configured to “align” with adjacent rows which were requested and rendered with the sameGtkCellAreaContext.Use
gtk_cell_area_class_install_cell_property()to install cell properties for a cell area class andgtk_cell_area_class_find_cell_property()orgtk_cell_area_class_list_cell_properties()to get information about existing cell properties.To set the value of a cell property, use
gtk_cell_area_cell_set_property(),gtk_cell_area_cell_set()orgtk_cell_area_cell_set_valist(). To obtain the value of a cell property, usegtk_cell_area_cell_get_property(),gtk_cell_area_cell_get()orgtk_cell_area_cell_get_valist().The
See moreCellAreaProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellAreainstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellArea. Alternatively, useCellAreaRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellAreaProtocol : InitiallyUnownedProtocol, BuildableProtocol, CellLayoutProtocol
-
A cell area that renders GtkCellRenderers into a row or a column
The
GtkCellAreaBoxrenders cell renderers into a row or a column depending on itsGtkOrientation.GtkCellAreaBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers to adding cell renderers with reference to a particular position in a
GtkCellAreaBox. There are two reference positions: the start and the end of the box. When theGtkCellAreaBoxis oriented in theGTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICALorientation, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is defined as the bottom. In theGTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTALorientation start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.Alignments of
GtkCellRenderers rendered in adjacent rows can be configured by configuring theGtkCellAreaBoxalign child cell property withgtk_cell_area_cell_set_property()or by specifying the “align” argument togtk_cell_area_box_pack_start()andgtk_cell_area_box_pack_end().The
See moreCellAreaBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellAreaBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellAreaBox. Alternatively, useCellAreaBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellAreaBoxProtocol : CellAreaProtocol, OrientableProtocol
-
Stores geometrical information for a series of rows in a GtkCellArea
The
GtkCellAreaContextobject is created by a givenGtkCellAreaimplementation via itsGtkCellAreaClass.create_context()virtual method and is used to store cell sizes and alignments for a series ofGtkTreeModelrows that are requested and rendered in the same context.GtkCellLayoutwidgets can create any number of contexts in which to request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the same context which was used to request sizes for a givenGtkTreeModelrow also be used for the same row when calling otherGtkCellAreaAPIs such asgtk_cell_area_render()andgtk_cell_area_event().The
See moreCellAreaContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellAreaContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellAreaContext. Alternatively, useCellAreaContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellAreaContextProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
An object for rendering a single cell
The
GtkCellRendereris a base class of a set of objects used for rendering a cell to acairo_t. These objects are used primarily by theGtkTreeViewwidget, though they aren’t tied to them in any specific way. It is worth noting thatGtkCellRendereris not aGtkWidgetand cannot be treated as such.The primary use of a
GtkCellRendereris for drawing a certain graphical elements on acairo_t. Typically, one cell renderer is used to draw many cells on the screen. To this extent, it isn’t expected that a CellRenderer keep any permanent state around. Instead, any state is set just prior to use usingGObjects property system. Then, the cell is measured usinggtk_cell_renderer_get_preferred_size(). Finally, the cell is rendered in the correct location usinggtk_cell_renderer_snapshot().There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new
GtkCellRenderer. First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size, barring a style change. TheGtkCellRendereralso has a number of generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.Beyond merely rendering a cell, cell renderers can optionally provide active user interface elements. A cell renderer can be “activatable” like
GtkCellRendererToggle, which toggles when it gets activated by a mouse click, or it can be “editable” likeGtkCellRendererText, which allows the user to edit the text using a widget implementing theGtkCellEditableinterface, e.g.GtkEntry. To make a cell renderer activatable or editable, you have to implement theGtkCellRendererClass.activate orGtkCellRendererClass.start_editing virtual functions, respectively.Many properties of
GtkCellRendererand its subclasses have a corresponding “set” property, e.g. “cell-background-set” corresponds to “cell-background”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not. You should not set them independently.The
See moreCellRendererProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRenderer. Alternatively, useCellRendererRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererProtocol : InitiallyUnownedProtocol
-
Renders a keyboard accelerator in a cell
GtkCellRendererAcceldisplays a keyboard accelerator (i.e. a key combination likeControl + a). If the cell renderer is editable, the accelerator can be changed by simply typing the new combination.The
See moreCellRendererAccelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererAccelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererAccel. Alternatively, useCellRendererAccelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererAccelProtocol : CellRendererTextProtocol
-
Renders a combobox in a cell
GtkCellRendererComborenders text in a cell likeGtkCellRendererTextfrom which it is derived. But whileGtkCellRendererTextoffers a simple entry to edit the text,GtkCellRendererCombooffers aGtkComboBoxwidget to edit the text. The values to display in the combo box are taken from the tree model specified in theGtkCellRendererCombo:model property.The combo cell renderer takes care of adding a text cell renderer to the combo box and sets it to display the column specified by its
GtkCellRendererCombo:text-column property. Further properties of the combo box can be set in a handler for theGtkCellRendererediting-started`` signal.The
See moreCellRendererComboProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererComboinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererCombo. Alternatively, useCellRendererComboRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererComboProtocol : CellRendererTextProtocol
-
Renders a pixbuf in a cell
A
GtkCellRendererPixbufcan be used to render an image in a cell. It allows to render either a givenGdkPixbuf(set via theGtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbufproperty) or a named icon (set via theGtkCellRendererPixbuf:icon-nameproperty).To support the tree view,
GtkCellRendererPixbufalso supports rendering two alternative pixbufs, when theGtkCellRenderer:is-expanderproperty istrue. If theGtkCellRenderer:is-expanded propertyistrueand theGtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-openproperty is set to a pixbuf, it renders that pixbuf, if theGtkCellRenderer:is-expandedproperty isfalseand theGtkCellRendererPixbuf:pixbuf-expander-closedproperty is set to a pixbuf, it renders that one.The
See moreCellRendererPixbufProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererPixbufinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererPixbuf. Alternatively, useCellRendererPixbufRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererPixbufProtocol : CellRendererProtocol
-
Renders numbers as progress bars
GtkCellRendererProgressrenders a numeric value as a progress par in a cell. Additionally, it can display a text on top of the progress bar.The
See moreCellRendererProgressProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererProgressinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererProgress. Alternatively, useCellRendererProgressRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererProgressProtocol : CellRendererProtocol, OrientableProtocol
-
Renders a spin button in a cell
GtkCellRendererSpinrenders text in a cell likeGtkCellRendererTextfrom which it is derived. But whileGtkCellRendererTextoffers a simple entry to edit the text,GtkCellRendererSpinoffers aGtkSpinButtonwidget. Of course, that means that the text has to be parseable as a floating point number.The range of the spinbutton is taken from the adjustment property of the cell renderer, which can be set explicitly or mapped to a column in the tree model, like all properties of cell renders.
GtkCellRendererSpinalso has properties for theGtkCellRendererSpin:climb-rateand the number ofGtkCellRendererSpin:digitsto display. OtherGtkSpinButtonproperties can be set in a handler for theGtkCellRendererediting-started`` signal.The
GtkCellRendererSpincell renderer was added in GTK 2.10.The
See moreCellRendererSpinProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererSpininstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererSpin. Alternatively, useCellRendererSpinRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererSpinProtocol : CellRendererTextProtocol
-
Renders a spinning animation in a cell
GtkCellRendererSpinnerrenders a spinning animation in a cell, very similar toGtkSpinner. It can often be used as an alternative to aGtkCellRendererProgressfor displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.To start the animation in a cell, set the
GtkCellRendererSpinner:activeproperty totrueand increment theGtkCellRendererSpinner:pulseproperty at regular intervals. The usual way to set the cell renderer properties for each cell is to bind them to columns in your tree model using e.g.gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute().The
See moreCellRendererSpinnerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererSpinnerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererSpinner. Alternatively, useCellRendererSpinnerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererSpinnerProtocol : CellRendererProtocol
-
Renders text in a cell
A
GtkCellRendererTextrenders a given text in its cell, using the font, color and style information provided by its properties. The text will be ellipsized if it is too long and theGtkCellRendererText:ellipsizeproperty allows it.If the
GtkCellRenderer:modeisGTK_CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE, theGtkCellRendererTextallows to edit its text using an entry.The
See moreCellRendererTextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererTextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererText. Alternatively, useCellRendererTextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererTextProtocol : CellRendererProtocol
-
Renders a toggle button in a cell
GtkCellRendererTogglerenders a toggle button in a cell. The button is drawn as a radio or a checkbutton, depending on theGtkCellRendererToggle:radioproperty. When activated, it emits theGtkCellRendererToggletoggled`` signal.The
See moreCellRendererToggleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererToggleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererToggle. Alternatively, useCellRendererToggleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererToggleProtocol : CellRendererProtocol
-
A widget displaying a single row of a GtkTreeModel
A
GtkCellViewdisplays a single row of aGtkTreeModelusing aGtkCellAreaandGtkCellAreaContext. AGtkCellAreaContextcan be provided to theGtkCellViewat construction time in order to keep the cellview in context of a group of cell views, this ensures that the renderers displayed will be properly aligned with each other (like the aligned cells in the menus ofGtkComboBox).GtkCellViewisGtkOrientablein order to decide in which orientation the underlyingGtkCellAreaContextshould be allocated. Taking theGtkComboBoxmenu as an example, cellviews should be oriented horizontally if the menus are listed top-to-bottom and thus all share the same width but may have separate individual heights (left-to-right menus should be allocated vertically since they all share the same height but may have variable widths).CSS nodes
GtkCellView has a single CSS node with name cellview.
The
See moreCellViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellView. Alternatively, useCellViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellViewProtocol : CellLayoutProtocol, OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkCenterBoxarranges three children in a row, keeping the middle child centered as well as possible.
To add children to
GtkCenterBox, use [methodGtk.CenterBox.set_start_widget], [methodGtk.CenterBox.set_center_widget] and [methodGtk.CenterBox.set_end_widget].The sizing and positioning of children can be influenced with the align and expand properties of the children.
GtkCenterBox as GtkBuildable
The
GtkCenterBoximplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports placing children in the 3 positions by specifying “start”, “center” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.CSS nodes
GtkCenterBoxuses a single CSS node with the name “box”,The first child of the
GtkCenterBoxwill be allocated depending on the text direction, i.e. in left-to-right layouts it will be allocated on the left and in right-to-left layouts on the right.In vertical orientation, the nodes of the children are arranged from top to bottom.
Accessibility
GtkCenterBoxuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreCenterBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCenterBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCenterBox. Alternatively, useCenterBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CenterBoxProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkCenterLayoutis a layout manager that manages up to three children.The start widget is allocated at the start of the layout (left in left-to-right locales and right in right-to-left ones), and the end widget at the end.
The center widget is centered regarding the full width of the layout’s.
The
See moreCenterLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCenterLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCenterLayout. Alternatively, useCenterLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CenterLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
A
GtkCheckButtonplaces a label next to an indicator.
A
GtkCheckButtonis created by calling either [ctorGtk.CheckButton.new] or [ctorGtk.CheckButton.new_with_label].The state of a
GtkCheckButtoncan be set specifically using [methodGtk.CheckButton.set_active], and retrieved using [methodGtk.CheckButton.get_active].Inconsistent state
In addition to “on” and “off”, check buttons can be an “in between” state that is neither on nor off. This can be used e.g. when the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a check button, and the current values in that range are inconsistent.
To set a
GtkCheckButtonto inconsistent state, use [methodGtk.CheckButton.set_inconsistent].Grouping
Check buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.
Grouped check buttons use a different indicator, and are commonly referred to as radio buttons.

To add a
GtkCheckButtonto a group, use [methodGtk.CheckButton.set_group].CSS nodes
checkbutton[.text-button] ├── check ╰── [label]A
GtkCheckButtonhas a main node with name checkbutton. If the [propertyGtk.CheckButton:label] property is set, it contains a label child. The indicator node is named check when no group is set, and radio if the checkbutton is grouped together with other checkbuttons.Accessibility
GtkCheckButtonuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_CHECKBOXrole.The
See moreCheckButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCheckButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCheckButton. Alternatively, useCheckButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CheckButtonProtocol : ActionableProtocol
-
An expression using a custom
GClosureto compute the value from its parameters.The
See moreClosureExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkClosureExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeClosureExpression. Alternatively, useClosureExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ClosureExpressionProtocol : ExpressionProtocol
-
The
GtkColorButtonallows to open a color chooser dialog to change the color.
It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
colorbutton ╰── button.color ╰── [content]GtkColorButtonhas a single CSS node with name colorbutton which contains a button node. To differentiate it from a plainGtkButton, it gets the .color style class.The
See moreColorButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColorButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColorButton. Alternatively, useColorButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColorButtonProtocol : ColorChooserProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A dialog for choosing a color.

GtkColorChooserDialogimplements the [ifaceGtk.ColorChooser] interface and does not provide much API of its own.To create a
GtkColorChooserDialog, use [ctorGtk.ColorChooserDialog.new].To change the initially selected color, use [method
Gtk.ColorChooser.set_rgba]. To get the selected color use [methodGtk.ColorChooser.get_rgba].The
See moreColorChooserDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColorChooserDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColorChooserDialog. Alternatively, useColorChooserDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColorChooserDialogProtocol : ColorChooserProtocol, DialogProtocol
-
The
GtkColorChooserWidgetwidget lets the user select a color.By default, the chooser presents a predefined palette of colors, plus a small number of settable custom colors. It is also possible to select a different color with the single-color editor.
To enter the single-color editing mode, use the context menu of any color of the palette, or use the ‘+’ button to add a new custom color.
The chooser automatically remembers the last selection, as well as custom colors.
To create a
GtkColorChooserWidget, use [ctorGtk.ColorChooserWidget.new].To change the initially selected color, use [method
Gtk.ColorChooser.set_rgba]. To get the selected color use [methodGtk.ColorChooser.get_rgba].The
GtkColorChooserWidgetis used in the [classGtk.ColorChooserDialog] to provide a dialog for selecting colors.CSS names
GtkColorChooserWidgethas a single CSS node with name colorchooser.The
See moreColorChooserWidgetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColorChooserWidgetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColorChooserWidget. Alternatively, useColorChooserWidgetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColorChooserWidgetProtocol : ColorChooserProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkColumnViewpresents a large dynamic list of items using multiple columns with headers.GtkColumnViewuses the factories of its columns to generate a cell widget for each column, for each visible item and displays them together as the row for this item.The [property
Gtk.ColumnView:show-row-separators] and [propertyGtk.ColumnView:show-column-separators] properties offer a simple way to display separators between the rows or columns.GtkColumnViewallows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on rubberband selection, using [propertyGtk.ColumnView:enable-rubberband].The column view supports sorting that can be customized by the user by clicking on column headers. To set this up, the
GtkSorterreturned by [methodGtk.ColumnView.get_sorter] must be attached to a sort model for the data that the view is showing, and the columns must have sorters attached to them by calling [methodGtk.ColumnViewColumn.set_sorter]. The initial sort order can be set with [methodGtk.ColumnView.sort_by_column].The column view also supports interactive resizing and reordering of columns, via Drag-and-Drop of the column headers. This can be enabled or disabled with the [property
Gtk.ColumnView:reorderable] and [propertyGtk.ColumnViewColumn:resizable] properties.To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
CSS nodes
columnview[.column-separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table] ├── header │ ├── <column header> ┊ ┊ │ ╰── <column header> │ ├── listview │ ┊ ╰── [rubberband]GtkColumnViewuses a single CSS node named columnview. It may carry the .column-separators style class, when [propertyGtk.ColumnView:show-column-separators] property is set. Header widgets appear below a node with name header. The rows are contained in aGtkListViewwidget, so there is a listview node with the same structure as for a standaloneGtkListViewwidget. If [propertyGtk.ColumnView:show-row-separators] is set, it will be passed on to the list view, causing its CSS node to carry the .separators style class. For rubberband selection, a node with name rubberband is used.The main columnview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
GtkColumnViewuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TREE_GRIDrole, header title widgets are using theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COLUMN_HEADERrole. The row widgets are using theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_ROWrole, and individual cells are using theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELLroleThe
See moreColumnViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColumnViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColumnView. Alternatively, useColumnViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColumnViewProtocol : ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkColumnViewColumnrepresents the columns being added toGtkColumnView.The main ingredient for a
GtkColumnViewColumnis theGtkListItemFactorythat tells the columnview how to create cells for this column from items in the model.Columns have a title, and can optionally have a header menu set with [method
Gtk.ColumnViewColumn.set_header_menu].A sorter can be associated with a column using [method
Gtk.ColumnViewColumn.set_sorter], to let users influence sorting by clicking on the column header.The
See moreColumnViewColumnProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColumnViewColumninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColumnViewColumn. Alternatively, useColumnViewColumnRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColumnViewColumnProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkComboBoxis a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of valid choices.
The
GtkComboBoxdisplays the selected choice; when activated, theGtkComboBoxdisplays a popup which allows the user to make a new choice.The
GtkComboBoxuses the model-view pattern; the list of valid choices is specified in the form of a tree model, and the display of the choices can be adapted to the data in the model by using cell renderers, as you would in a tree view. This is possible sinceGtkComboBoximplements the [ifaceGtk.CellLayout] interface. The tree model holding the valid choices is not restricted to a flat list, it can be a real tree, and the popup will reflect the tree structure.To allow the user to enter values not in the model, the [property
Gtk.ComboBox:has-entry] property allows theGtkComboBoxto contain a [classGtk.Entry]. This entry can be accessed by calling [methodGtk.ComboBox.get_child] on the combo box.For a simple list of textual choices, the model-view API of
GtkComboBoxcan be a bit overwhelming. In this case, [classGtk.ComboBoxText] offers a simple alternative. BothGtkComboBoxandGtkComboBoxTextcan contain an entry.CSS nodes
combobox ├── box.linked │ ╰── button.combo │ ╰── box │ ├── cellview │ ╰── arrow ╰── window.popupA normal combobox contains a box with the .linked class, a button with the .combo class and inside those buttons, there are a cellview and an arrow.
combobox ├── box.linked │ ├── entry.combo │ ╰── button.combo │ ╰── box │ ╰── arrow ╰── window.popupA
GtkComboBoxwith an entry has a single CSS node with name combobox. It contains a box with the .linked class. That box contains an entry and a button, both with the .combo class added. The button also contains another node with name arrow.Accessibility
GtkComboBoxuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COMBO_BOXrole.The
See moreComboBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkComboBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeComboBox. Alternatively, useComboBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ComboBoxProtocol : CellEditableProtocol, CellLayoutProtocol
-
A
GtkComboBoxTextis a simple variant ofGtkComboBoxfor text-only use cases.
GtkComboBoxTexthides the model-view complexity ofGtkComboBox.To create a
GtkComboBoxText, use [ctorGtk.ComboBoxText.new] or [ctorGtk.ComboBoxText.new_with_entry].You can add items to a
GtkComboBoxTextwith [methodGtk.ComboBoxText.append_text], [methodGtk.ComboBoxText.insert_text] or [methodGtk.ComboBoxText.prepend_text] and remove options with [methodGtk.ComboBoxText.remove].If the
GtkComboBoxTextcontains an entry (via the [propertyGtk.ComboBox:has-entry] property), its contents can be retrieved using [methodGtk.ComboBoxText.get_active_text].You should not call [method
Gtk.ComboBox.set_model] or attempt to pack more cells into this combo box via its [ifaceGtk.CellLayout] interface.GtkComboBoxText as GtkBuildable
The
GtkComboBoxTextimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element can specify the “id” corresponding to the appended text and also supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.Here is a UI definition fragment specifying
GtkComboBoxTextitems:<object class="GtkComboBoxText"> <items> <item translatable="yes" id="factory">Factory</item> <item translatable="yes" id="home">Home</item> <item translatable="yes" id="subway">Subway</item> </items> </object>CSS nodes
combobox ╰── box.linked ├── entry.combo ├── button.combo ╰── window.popupGtkComboBoxTexthas a single CSS node with name combobox. It adds the style class .combo to the main CSS nodes of its entry and button children, and the .linked class to the node of its internal box.The
See moreComboBoxTextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkComboBoxTextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeComboBoxText. Alternatively, useComboBoxTextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ComboBoxTextProtocol : ComboBoxProtocol
-
A constant value in a
GtkExpression.The
See moreConstantExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstantExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstantExpression. Alternatively, useConstantExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstantExpressionProtocol : ExpressionProtocol
-
GtkConstraintdescribes a constraint between attributes of two widgets, expressed as a linear equation.The typical equation for a constraint is:
target.target_attr = source.source_attr × multiplier + constantEach
GtkConstraintis part of a system that will be solved by a [classGtk.ConstraintLayout] in order to allocate and position each child widget or guide.The source and target, as well as their attributes, of a
GtkConstraintinstance are immutable after creation.The
See moreConstraintProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraint. Alternatively, useConstraintRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkConstraintGuideis an invisible layout element in aGtkConstraintLayout.The
GtkConstraintLayouttreats guides like widgets. They can be used as the source or target of aGtkConstraint.Guides have a minimum, maximum and natural size. Depending on the constraints that are applied, they can act like a guideline that widgets can be aligned to, or like flexible space.
Unlike a
GtkWidget, aGtkConstraintGuidewill not be drawn.The
See moreConstraintGuideProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintGuideinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintGuide. Alternatively, useConstraintGuideRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintGuideProtocol : ObjectProtocol, ConstraintTargetProtocol
-
A layout manager using constraints to describe relations between widgets.
GtkConstraintLayoutis a layout manager that uses relations between widget attributes, expressed via [classGtk.Constraint] instances, to measure and allocate widgets.How do constraints work
Constraints are objects defining the relationship between attributes of a widget; you can read the description of the [class
Gtk.Constraint] class to have a more in depth definition.By taking multiple constraints and applying them to the children of a widget using
GtkConstraintLayout, it’s possible to describe complex layout policies; each constraint applied to a child or to the parent widgets contributes to the full description of the layout, in terms of parameters for resolving the value of each attribute.It is important to note that a layout is defined by the totality of constraints; removing a child, or a constraint, from an existing layout without changing the remaining constraints may result in an unstable or unsolvable layout.
Constraints have an implicit “reading order”; you should start describing each edge of each child, as well as their relationship with the parent container, from the top left (or top right, in RTL languages), horizontally first, and then vertically.
A constraint-based layout with too few constraints can become “unstable”, that is: have more than one solution. The behavior of an unstable layout is undefined.
A constraint-based layout with conflicting constraints may be unsolvable, and lead to an unstable layout. You can use the [property
Gtk.Constraint:strength] property of [classGtk.Constraint] to “nudge” the layout towards a solution.GtkConstraintLayout as GtkBuildable
GtkConstraintLayoutimplements the [ifaceGtk.Buildable] interface and has a custom “constraints” element which allows describing constraints in a [classGtk.Builder] UI file.An example of a UI definition fragment specifying a constraint:
<object class="GtkConstraintLayout"> <constraints> <constraint target="button" target-attribute="start" relation="eq" source="super" source-attribute="start" constant="12" strength="required" /> <constraint target="button" target-attribute="width" relation="ge" constant="250" strength="strong" /> </constraints> </object>The definition above will add two constraints to the GtkConstraintLayout:
- a required constraint between the leading edge of “button” and the leading edge of the widget using the constraint layout, plus 12 pixels
- a strong, constant constraint making the width of “button” greater than, or equal to 250 pixels
The “target” and “target-attribute” attributes are required.
The “source” and “source-attribute” attributes of the “constraint” element are optional; if they are not specified, the constraint is assumed to be a constant.
The “relation” attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be an equality.
The “strength” attribute is optional; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to be required.
The “source” and “target” attributes can be set to “super” to indicate that the constraint target is the widget using the GtkConstraintLayout.
There can be “constant” and “multiplier” attributes.
Additionally, the “constraints” element can also contain a description of the
GtkConstraintGuidesused by the layout:<constraints> <guide min-width="100" max-width="500" name="hspace"/> <guide min-height="64" nat-height="128" name="vspace" strength="strong"/> </constraints>The “guide” element has the following optional attributes:
- “min-width”, “nat-width”, and “max-width”, describe the minimum, natural, and maximum width of the guide, respectively
- “min-height”, “nat-height”, and “max-height”, describe the minimum, natural, and maximum height of the guide, respectively
- “strength” describes the strength of the constraint on the natural size of the guide; if not specified, the constraint is assumed to have a medium strength
- “name” describes a name for the guide, useful when debugging
Using the Visual Format Language
Complex constraints can be described using a compact syntax called VFL, or Visual Format Language.
The Visual Format Language describes all the constraints on a row or column, typically starting from the leading edge towards the trailing one. Each element of the layout is composed by “views”, which identify a [iface
Gtk.ConstraintTarget].For instance:
[button]-[textField]Describes a constraint that binds the trailing edge of “button” to the leading edge of “textField”, leaving a default space between the two.
Using VFL is also possible to specify predicates that describe constraints on attributes like width and height:
// Width must be greater than, or equal to 50 [`button(>=50)`] // Width of button1 must be equal to width of button2 [`button1(==button2)`]The default orientation for a VFL description is horizontal, unless otherwise specified:
// horizontal orientation, default attribute: width H:[`button(>=150)`] // vertical orientation, default attribute: height V:[`button1(==button2)`]It’s also possible to specify multiple predicates, as well as their strength:
// minimum width of button must be 150 // natural width of button can be 250 [`button(>=150@required, ==250@medium)`]Finally, it’s also possible to use simple arithmetic operators:
// width of button1 must be equal to width of button2 // divided by 2 plus 12 [`button1(button2 / 2 + 12)`]The
See moreConstraintLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintLayout. Alternatively, useConstraintLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintLayoutProtocol : BuildableProtocol, LayoutManagerProtocol
-
GtkLayoutChildsubclass for children in aGtkConstraintLayout.The
See moreConstraintLayoutChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintLayoutChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintLayoutChild. Alternatively, useConstraintLayoutChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintLayoutChildProtocol : LayoutChildProtocol
-
GtkCustomFilterdetermines whether to include items with a callback.The
See moreCustomFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomFilter. Alternatively, useCustomFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomFilterProtocol : FilterProtocol
-
GtkCustomLayoutuses closures for size negotiation.A
GtkCustomLayoutuses closures matching to the oldGtkWidgetvirtual functions for size negotiation, as a convenience API to ease the porting towards the corresponding `GtkLayoutManager virtual functions.The
See moreCustomLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomLayout. Alternatively, useCustomLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
GtkCustomSorteris aGtkSorterimplementation that sorts via a callback function.The
See moreCustomSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomSorter. Alternatively, useCustomSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomSorterProtocol : SorterProtocol
-
Dialogs are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount of input.

Typical uses are to display a message, ask a question, or anything else that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.
The main area of a
GtkDialogis called the “content area”, and is yours to populate with widgets such aGtkLabelorGtkEntry, to present your information, questions, or tasks to the user.In addition, dialogs allow you to add “action widgets”. Most commonly, action widgets are buttons. Depending on the platform, action widgets may be presented in the header bar at the top of the window, or at the bottom of the window. To add action widgets, create your
GtkDialogusing [ctorGtk.Dialog.new_with_buttons], or use [methodGtk.Dialog.add_button], [methodGtk.Dialog.add_buttons], or [methodGtk.Dialog.add_action_widget].GtkDialogsuses some heuristics to decide whether to add a close button to the window decorations. If any of the action buttons use the response IDGTK_RESPONSE_CLOSEorGTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL, the close button is omitted.Clicking a button that was added as an action widget will emit the [signal
Gtk.Dialog::response] signal with a response ID that you specified. GTK will never assign a meaning to positive response IDs; these are entirely user-defined. But for convenience, you can use the response IDs in the [enumGtk.ResponseType] enumeration (these all have values less than zero). If a dialog receives a delete event, the [signalGtk.Dialog::response] signal will be emitted with theGTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENTresponse ID.Dialogs are created with a call to [ctor
Gtk.Dialog.new] or [ctorGtk.Dialog.new_with_buttons]. The latter is recommended; it allows you to set the dialog title, some convenient flags, and add buttons.A “modal” dialog (that is, one which freezes the rest of the application from user input), can be created by calling [method
Gtk.Window.set_modal] on the dialog. When using [ctorGtk.Dialog.new_with_buttons], you can also pass theGTK_DIALOG_MODALflag to make a dialog modal.For the simple dialog in the following example, a [class
Gtk.MessageDialog] would save some effort. But you’d need to create the dialog contents manually if you had more than a simple message in the dialog.An example for simple
GtkDialogusage:// Function to open a dialog box with a message void quick_message (GtkWindow *parent, char *message) { GtkWidget *dialog, *label, *content_area; GtkDialogFlags flags; // Create the widgets flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT; dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("Message", parent, flags, `_("_OK")`, GTK_RESPONSE_NONE, NULL); content_area = gtk_dialog_get_content_area (GTK_DIALOG (dialog)); label = gtk_label_new (message); // Ensure that the dialog box is destroyed when the user responds g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy), dialog); // Add the label, and show everything we’ve added gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (content_area), label); gtk_widget_show (dialog); }GtkDialog as GtkBuildable
The
GtkDialogimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface exposes thecontent_areaas an internal child with the name “content_area”.GtkDialogsupports a custom<action-widgets>element, which can contain multiple<action-widget>elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogsaction_area). To mark a response as default, set the “default” attribute of the<action-widget>element to true.GtkDialogsupports adding action widgets by specifying “action” as the “type” attribute of a<child>element. The widget will be added either to the action area or the headerbar of the dialog, depending on the “use-header-bar” property. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the<action-widgets>element.An example of a
GtkDialogUI definition fragment:<object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1"> <child type="action"> <object class="GtkButton" id="button_cancel"/> </child> <child type="action"> <object class="GtkButton" id="button_ok"> </object> </child> <action-widgets> <action-widget response="cancel">button_cancel</action-widget> <action-widget response="ok" default="true">button_ok</action-widget> </action-widgets> </object>Accessibility
GtkDialoguses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_DIALOGrole.The
See moreDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDialog. Alternatively, useDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DialogProtocol : WindowProtocol
-
The
See moreCellAreaClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellAreaClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellAreaClass. Alternatively, useCellAreaClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellAreaClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCellAreaContextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellAreaContextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellAreaContextClass. Alternatively, useCellAreaContextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellAreaContextClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCellEditableIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellEditableIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellEditableIface. Alternatively, useCellEditableIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellEditableIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreCellLayoutIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellLayoutIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellLayoutIface. Alternatively, useCellLayoutIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellLayoutIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreCellRendererClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererClass. Alternatively, useCellRendererClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCellRendererClassPrivateProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererClassPrivateinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererClassPrivate. Alternatively, useCellRendererClassPrivateRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererClassPrivateProtocol
-
The
See moreCellRendererTextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellRendererTextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellRendererTextClass. Alternatively, useCellRendererTextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellRendererTextClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCenterBoxClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCenterBoxClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCenterBoxClass. Alternatively, useCenterBoxClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CenterBoxClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCenterLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCenterLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCenterLayoutClass. Alternatively, useCenterLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CenterLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCheckButtonClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCheckButtonClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCheckButtonClass. Alternatively, useCheckButtonClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CheckButtonClassProtocol
-
The
See moreColorChooserInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColorChooserInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColorChooserInterface. Alternatively, useColorChooserInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColorChooserInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreColumnViewClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColumnViewClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColumnViewClass. Alternatively, useColumnViewClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColumnViewClassProtocol
-
The
See moreColumnViewColumnClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColumnViewColumnClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColumnViewColumnClass. Alternatively, useColumnViewColumnClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColumnViewColumnClassProtocol
-
The
See moreComboBoxClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkComboBoxClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeComboBoxClass. Alternatively, useComboBoxClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ComboBoxClassProtocol
-
The
See moreConstraintClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintClass. Alternatively, useConstraintClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintClassProtocol
-
The
See moreConstraintGuideClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintGuideClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintGuideClass. Alternatively, useConstraintGuideClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintGuideClassProtocol
-
The
See moreConstraintLayoutChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintLayoutChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintLayoutChildClass. Alternatively, useConstraintLayoutChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintLayoutChildClassProtocol
-
The
See moreConstraintLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintLayoutClass. Alternatively, useConstraintLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreConstraintTargetInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintTargetInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintTargetInterface. Alternatively, useConstraintTargetInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintTargetInterfaceProtocol
-
Represents a location in a file or other source of data parsed by the CSS engine.
The
bytesandline_bytesoffsets are meant to be used to programmatically match data. Thelinesandline_charsoffsets can be used for printing the location in a file.Note that the
linesparameter starts from 0 and is increased whenever a CSS line break is encountered. (CSS defines the C character sequences “\r\n”, “\r”, “\n” and “\f” as newlines.) If your document uses different rules for line breaking, you might want run into problems here.The
See moreCssLocationProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCssLocationinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCssLocation. Alternatively, useCssLocationRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CssLocationProtocol
-
The
See moreCssProviderClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCssProviderClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCssProviderClass. Alternatively, useCssProviderClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CssProviderClassProtocol
-
Defines a part of a CSS document.
Because sections are nested into one another, you can use
gtk_css_section_get_parent()to get the containing region.The
See moreCssSectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCssSectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCssSection. Alternatively, useCssSectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CssSectionProtocol
-
The
See moreCssStyleChangeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCssStyleChangeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCssStyleChange. Alternatively, useCssStyleChangeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CssStyleChangeProtocol
-
The
See moreCustomFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomFilterClass. Alternatively, useCustomFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomFilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCustomLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomLayoutClass. Alternatively, useCustomLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreCustomSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCustomSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCustomSorterClass. Alternatively, useCustomSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CustomSorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDialogClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDialogClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDialogClass. Alternatively, useDialogClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DialogClassProtocol
-
An interface for packing cells
GtkCellLayoutis an interface to be implemented by all objects which want to provide aGtkTreeViewColumnlike API for packing cells, setting attributes and data funcs.One of the notable features provided by implementations of
GtkCellLayoutare attributes. Attributes let you set the properties in flexible ways. They can just be set to constant values like regular properties. But they can also be mapped to a column of the underlying tree model withgtk_cell_layout_set_attributes(), which means that the value of the attribute can change from cell to cell as they are rendered by the cell renderer. Finally, it is possible to specify a function withgtk_cell_layout_set_cell_data_func()that is called to determine the value of the attribute for each cell that is rendered.GtkCellLayouts as GtkBuildable
Implementations of GtkCellLayout which also implement the GtkBuildable interface (
GtkCellView,GtkIconView,GtkComboBox,GtkEntryCompletion,GtkTreeViewColumn) acceptGtkCellRendererobjects as <child> elements in UI definitions. They support a custom <attributes> element for their children, which can contain multiple <attribute> elements. Each <attribute> element has a name attribute which specifies a property of the cell renderer; the content of the element is the attribute value.This is an example of a UI definition fragment specifying attributes:
<object class="GtkCellView"> <child> <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/> <attributes> <attribute name="text">0</attribute> </attributes> </child>" </object>Furthermore for implementations of GtkCellLayout that use a
GtkCellAreato lay out cells (all GtkCellLayouts in GTK use a GtkCellArea) cell properties can also be defined in the format by specifying the custom <cell-packing> attribute which can contain multiple <property> elements defined in the normal way.Here is a UI definition fragment specifying cell properties:
<object class="GtkTreeViewColumn"> <child> <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/> <cell-packing> <property name="align">True</property> <property name="expand">False</property> </cell-packing> </child>" </object>Subclassing GtkCellLayout implementations
When subclassing a widget that implements
GtkCellLayoutlikeGtkIconVieworGtkComboBox, there are some considerations related to the fact that these widgets internally use aGtkCellArea. The cell area is exposed as a construct-only property by these widgets. This means that it is possible to e.g. do(C Language Example):
combo = g_object_new (GTK_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", my_cell_area, NULL);to use a custom cell area with a combo box. But construct properties are only initialized after instance
init()functions have run, which means that using functions which rely on the existence of the cell area in your subclass’init()function will cause the default cell area to be instantiated. In this case, a provided construct property value will be ignored (with a warning, to alert you to the problem).(C Language Example):
static void my_combo_box_init (MyComboBox *b) { GtkCellRenderer *cell; cell = gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new (); // The following call causes the default cell area for combo boxes, // a GtkCellAreaBox, to be instantiated gtk_cell_layout_pack_start (GTK_CELL_LAYOUT (b), cell, FALSE); ... } GtkWidget * my_combo_box_new (GtkCellArea *area) { // This call is going to cause a warning about area being ignored return g_object_new (MY_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", area, NULL); }If supporting alternative cell areas with your derived widget is not important, then this does not have to concern you. If you want to support alternative cell areas, you can do so by moving the problematic calls out of
init()and into aconstructor()for your class.The
See moreCellLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkCellLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeCellLayout. Alternatively, useCellLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol CellLayoutProtocol
-
GtkColorChooseris an interface that is implemented by widgets for choosing colors.Depending on the situation, colors may be allowed to have alpha (translucency).
In GTK, the main widgets that implement this interface are [class
Gtk.ColorChooserWidget], [classGtk.ColorChooserDialog] and [classGtk.ColorButton].The
See moreColorChooserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkColorChooserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeColorChooser. Alternatively, useColorChooserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ColorChooserProtocol
-
The
GtkConstraintTargetinterface is implemented by objects that can be used as source or target inGtkConstraints.Besides
GtkWidget, it is also implemented byGtkConstraintGuide.The
See moreConstraintTargetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkConstraintTargetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeConstraintTarget. Alternatively, useConstraintTargetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ConstraintTargetProtocol
-
GtkEditableis an interface for text editing widgets.Typical examples of editable widgets are [class
Gtk.Entry] and [classGtk.SpinButton]. It contains functions for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can connect to modify the behavior of a widget.As an example of the latter usage, by connecting the following handler to [signal
Gtk.Editable::insert-text], an application can convert all entry into a widget into uppercase.Forcing entry to uppercase.
`include` <ctype.h> void insert_text_handler (GtkEditable *editable, const char *text, int length, int *position, gpointer data) { char *result = g_utf8_strup (text, length); g_signal_handlers_block_by_func (editable, (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data); gtk_editable_insert_text (editable, result, length, position); g_signal_handlers_unblock_by_func (editable, (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data); g_signal_stop_emission_by_name (editable, "insert_text"); g_free (result); }Implementing GtkEditable
The most likely scenario for implementing
GtkEditableon your own widget is that you will embed aGtkTextinside a complex widget, and want to delegate the editable functionality to that text widget.GtkEditableprovides some utility functions to make this easy.In your class_init function, call [func
Gtk.Editable.install_properties], passing the first available property ID:static void my_class_init (MyClass *class) { ... g_object_class_install_properties (object_class, NUM_PROPERTIES, props); gtk_editable_install_properties (object_clas, NUM_PROPERTIES); ... }In your interface_init function for the
GtkEditableinterface, provide an implementation for the get_delegate vfunc that returns your text widget:GtkEditable * get_editable_delegate (GtkEditable *editable) { return GTK_EDITABLE (MY_WIDGET (editable)->text_widget); } static void my_editable_init (GtkEditableInterface *iface) { iface->get_delegate = get_editable_delegate; }You don’t need to provide any other vfuncs. The default implementations work by forwarding to the delegate that the
GtkEditableInterface.get_delegate()vfunc returns.In your instance_init function, create your text widget, and then call [method
Gtk.Editable.init_delegate]:static void my_widget_init (MyWidget *self) { ... self->text_widget = gtk_text_new (); gtk_editable_init_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self)); ... }In your dispose function, call [method
Gtk.Editable.finish_delegate] before destroying your text widget:static void my_widget_dispose (GObject *object) { ... gtk_editable_finish_delegate (GTK_EDITABLE (self)); g_clear_pointer (&self->text_widget, gtk_widget_unparent); ... }Finally, use [func
Gtk.Editable.delegate_set_property] in yourset_propertyfunction (and similar forget_property), to set the editable properties:... if (gtk_editable_delegate_set_property (object, prop_id, value, pspec)) return; switch (prop_id) ...It is important to note that if you create a
GtkEditablethat uses a delegate, the low level [signalGtk.Editable::insert-text] and [signalGtk.Editable::delete-text] signals will be propagated from the “wrapper” editable to the delegate, but they will not be propagated from the delegate to the “wrapper” editable, as they would cause an infinite recursion. If you wish to connect to the [signalGtk.Editable::insert-text] and [signalGtk.Editable::delete-text] signals, you will need to connect to them on the delegate obtained via [methodGtk.Editable.get_delegate].The
See moreEditableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEditableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEditable. Alternatively, useEditableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EditableProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkDirectoryListis a list model that wrapsg_file_enumerate_children_async().It presents a
GListModeland fills it asynchronously with theGFileInfos returned from that function.Enumeration will start automatically when a the [property
Gtk.DirectoryList:file] property is set.While the
GtkDirectoryListis being filled, the [propertyGtk.DirectoryList:loading] property will be set totrue. You can listen to that property if you want to show information like aGtkSpinneror a “Loading…” text.If loading fails at any point, the [property
Gtk.DirectoryList:error] property will be set to give more indication about the failure.The
GFileInfos returned from aGtkDirectoryListhave the “standardfile” attribute set to theGFilethey refer to. This way you can get at the file that is referred to in the same way you would viag_file_enumerator_get_child(). This means you do not need access to theGtkDirectoryList, but can access theGFiledirectly from theGFileInfowhen operating with aGtkListViewor similar.The
See moreDirectoryListProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDirectoryListinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDirectoryList. Alternatively, useDirectoryListRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DirectoryListProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkDragIconis aGtkRootimplementation for drag icons.A drag icon moves with the pointer during a Drag-and-Drop operation and is destroyed when the drag ends.
To set up a drag icon and associate it with an ongoing drag operation, use [func
Gtk.DragIcon.get_for_drag] to get the icon for a drag. You can then use it like any other widget and use [methodGtk.DragIcon.set_child] to set whatever widget should be used for the drag icon.Keep in mind that drag icons do not allow user input.
The
See moreDragIconProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDragIconinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDragIcon. Alternatively, useDragIconRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DragIconProtocol : RootProtocol
-
GtkDragSourceis an event controller to initiate Drag-And-Drop operations.GtkDragSourcecan be set up with the necessary ingredients for a DND operation ahead of time. This includes the source for the data that is being transferred, in the form of a [classGdk.ContentProvider], the desired action, and the icon to use during the drag operation. After setting it up, the drag source must be added to a widget as an event controller, using [methodGtk.Widget.add_controller].static void my_widget_init (MyWidget *self) { GtkDragSource *drag_source = gtk_drag_source_new (); g_signal_connect (drag_source, "prepare", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_prepare), self); g_signal_connect (drag_source, "drag-begin", G_CALLBACK (on_drag_begin), self); gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (drag_source)); }Setting up the content provider and icon ahead of time only makes sense when the data does not change. More commonly, you will want to set them up just in time. To do so,
GtkDragSourcehas [signalGtk.DragSource::prepare] and [signalGtk.DragSource::drag-begin] signals.The
preparesignal is emitted before a drag is started, and can be used to set the content provider and actions that the drag should be started with.static GdkContentProvider * on_drag_prepare (GtkDragSource *source, double x, double y, MyWidget *self) { // This widget supports two types of content: GFile objects // and GdkPixbuf objects; GTK will handle the serialization // of these types automatically GFile *file = my_widget_get_file (self); GdkPixbuf *pixbuf = my_widget_get_pixbuf (self); return gdk_content_provider_new_union ((GdkContentProvider *[2]) { gdk_content_provider_new_typed (G_TYPE_FILE, file), gdk_content_provider_new_typed (GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF, pixbuf), }, 2); }The
drag-beginsignal is emitted after theGdkDragobject has been created, and can be used to set up the drag icon.static void on_drag_begin (GtkDragSource *source, GtkDrag *drag, MyWidget *self) { // Set the widget as the drag icon GdkPaintable *paintable = gtk_widget_paintable_new (GTK_WIDGET (self)); gtk_drag_source_set_icon (source, paintable, 0, 0); g_object_unref (paintable); }During the DND operation,
GtkDragSourceemits signals that can be used to obtain updates about the status of the operation, but it is not normally necessary to connect to any signals, except for one case: when the supported actions includeGDK_ACTION_MOVE, you need to listen for the [signalGtk.DragSource::drag-end] signal and delete the data after it has been transferred.The
See moreDragSourceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDragSourceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDragSource. Alternatively, useDragSourceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DragSourceProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkDropControllerMotionis an event controller tracking the pointer during Drag-and-Drop operations.It is modeled after [class
Gtk.EventControllerMotion] so if you have used that, this should feel really familiar.This controller is not able to accept drops, use [class
Gtk.DropTarget] for that purpose.The
See moreDropControllerMotionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropControllerMotioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropControllerMotion. Alternatively, useDropControllerMotionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropControllerMotionProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkDropDownis a widget that allows the user to choose an item from a list of options.
The
GtkDropDowndisplays the selected choice.The options are given to
GtkDropDownin the form ofGListModeland how the individual options are represented is determined by a [classGtk.ListItemFactory]. The default factory displays simple strings.GtkDropDownknows how to obtain strings from the items in a [classGtk.StringList]; for other models, you have to provide an expression to find the strings via [methodGtk.DropDown.set_expression].GtkDropDowncan optionally allow search in the popup, which is useful if the list of options is long. To enable the search entry, use [methodGtk.DropDown.set_enable_search].CSS nodes
GtkDropDownhas a single CSS node with name dropdown, with the button and popover nodes as children.Accessibility
GtkDropDownuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_COMBO_BOXrole.The
See moreDropDownProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropDowninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropDown. Alternatively, useDropDownRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropDownProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkDropTargetis an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations.The most basic way to use a
GtkDropTargetto receive drops on a widget is to create it via [ctorGtk.DropTarget.new], passing in theGTypeof the data you want to receive and connect to the [signalGtk.DropTarget::drop] signal to receive the data:static gboolean on_drop (GtkDropTarget *target, const GValue *value, double x, double y, gpointer data) { MyWidget *self = data; // Call the appropriate setter depending on the type of data // that we received if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, G_TYPE_FILE)) my_widget_set_file (self, g_value_get_object (value)); else if (G_VALUE_HOLDS (value, GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF)) my_widget_set_pixbuf (self, g_value_get_object (value)); else return FALSE; return TRUE; } static void my_widget_init (MyWidget *self) { GtkDropTarget *target = gtk_drop_target_new (G_TYPE_INVALID, GDK_ACTION_COPY); // This widget accepts two types of drop types: GFile objects // and GdkPixbuf objects gtk_drop_target_set_gtypes (target, (GTypes [2]) { G_TYPE_FILE, GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF, }, 2); gtk_widget_add_controller (GTK_WIDGET (self), GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER (target)); }GtkDropTargetsupports more options, such as:- rejecting potential drops via the [signal
Gtk.DropTarget::accept] signal and the [methodGtk.DropTarget.reject] function to let other drop targets handle the drop - tracking an ongoing drag operation before the drop via the
[signal
Gtk.DropTarget::enter], [signalGtk.DropTarget::motion] and [signalGtk.DropTarget::leave] signals - configuring how to receive data by setting the
[property
Gtk.DropTarget:preload] property and listening for its availability via the [propertyGtk.DropTarget:value] property
However,
GtkDropTargetis ultimately modeled in a synchronous way and only supports data transferred viaGType. If you want full control over an ongoing drop, the [classGtk.DropTargetAsync] object gives you this ability.While a pointer is dragged over the drop target’s widget and the drop has not been rejected, that widget will receive the
GTK_STATE_FLAG_DROP_ACTIVEstate, which can be used to style the widget.If you are not interested in receiving the drop, but just want to update UI state during a Drag-and-Drop operation (e.g. switching tabs), you can use [class
Gtk.DropControllerMotion].The
See moreDropTargetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropTargetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropTarget. Alternatively, useDropTargetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropTargetProtocol : EventControllerProtocol - rejecting potential drops via the [signal
-
GtkDropTargetAsyncis an event controller to receive Drag-and-Drop operations, asynchronously.It is the more complete but also more complex method of handling drop operations compared to [class
Gtk.DropTarget], and you should only use it ifGtkDropTargetdoesn’t provide all the features you need.To use a
GtkDropTargetAsyncto receive drops on a widget, you create aGtkDropTargetAsyncobject, configure which data formats and actions you support, connect to its signals, and then attach it to the widget with [methodGtk.Widget.add_controller].During a drag operation, the first signal that a
GtkDropTargetAsyncemits is [signalGtk.DropTargetAsync::accept], which is meant to determine whether the target is a possible drop site for the ongoing drop. The default handler for theacceptsignal accepts the drop if it finds a compatible data format and an action that is supported on both sides.If it is, and the widget becomes a target, you will receive a [signal
Gtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-enter] signal, followed by [signalGtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-motion] signals as the pointer moves, optionally a [signalGtk.DropTargetAsync::drop] signal when a drop happens, and finally a [signalGtk.DropTargetAsync::drag-leave] signal when the pointer moves off the widget.The
drag-enteranddrag-motionhandler return aGdkDragActionto update the status of the ongoing operation. Thedrophandler should decide if it ultimately accepts the drop and if it does, it should initiate the data transfer and finish the operation by calling [methodGdk.Drop.finish].Between the
drag-enteranddrag-leavesignals the widget is a current drop target, and will receive theGTK_STATE_FLAG_DROP_ACTIVEstate, which can be used by themes to style the widget as a drop target.The
See moreDropTargetAsyncProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropTargetAsyncinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropTargetAsync. Alternatively, useDropTargetAsyncRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropTargetAsyncProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
A
GtkEditableLabelis a label that allows users to edit the text by switching to an “edit mode”.
GtkEditableLabeldoes not have API of its own, but it implements the [ifaceGtk.Editable] interface.The default bindings for activating the edit mode is to click or press the Enter key. The default bindings for leaving the edit mode are the Enter key (to save the results) or the Escape key (to cancel the editing).
CSS nodes
editablelabel[.editing] ╰── stack ├── label ╰── textGtkEditableLabelhas a main node with the name editablelabel. When the entry is in editing mode, it gets the .editing style class.For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see [class
Gtk.Text].The
See moreEditableLabelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEditableLabelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEditableLabel. Alternatively, useEditableLabelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EditableLabelProtocol : EditableProtocol
-
The
See moreDirectoryListClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDirectoryListClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDirectoryListClass. Alternatively, useDirectoryListClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DirectoryListClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDragIconClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDragIconClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDragIconClass. Alternatively, useDragIconClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DragIconClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDragSourceClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDragSourceClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDragSourceClass. Alternatively, useDragSourceClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DragSourceClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDrawingAreaClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDrawingAreaClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDrawingAreaClass. Alternatively, useDrawingAreaClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DrawingAreaClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDropControllerMotionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropControllerMotionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropControllerMotionClass. Alternatively, useDropControllerMotionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropControllerMotionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDropDownClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropDownClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropDownClass. Alternatively, useDropDownClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropDownClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDropTargetAsyncClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropTargetAsyncClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropTargetAsyncClass. Alternatively, useDropTargetAsyncClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropTargetAsyncClassProtocol
-
The
See moreDropTargetClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkDropTargetClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeDropTargetClass. Alternatively, useDropTargetClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol DropTargetClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEditableInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEditableInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEditableInterface. Alternatively, useEditableInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EditableInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreEditableLabelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEditableLabelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEditableLabelClass. Alternatively, useEditableLabelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EditableLabelClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEmojiChooserClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEmojiChooserClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEmojiChooserClass. Alternatively, useEmojiChooserClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EmojiChooserClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEntryBufferClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEntryBufferClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEntryBufferClass. Alternatively, useEntryBufferClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EntryBufferClassProtocol
-
Class structure for
GtkEntry. All virtual functions have a default implementation. Derived classes may set the virtual function pointers for the signal handlers tonil, but must keepget_text_area_sizeandget_frame_sizenon-nil; either use the default implementation, or provide a custom one.The
See moreEntryClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEntryClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEntryClass. Alternatively, useEntryClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EntryClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerFocusClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerFocusClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerFocusClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerFocusClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerFocusClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerKeyClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerKeyClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerKeyClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerKeyClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerKeyClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerLegacyClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerLegacyClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerLegacyClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerLegacyClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerLegacyClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerMotionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerMotionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerMotionClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerMotionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerMotionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEventControllerScrollClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerScrollClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerScrollClass. Alternatively, useEventControllerScrollClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerScrollClassProtocol
-
The
See moreEveryFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEveryFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEveryFilterClass. Alternatively, useEveryFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EveryFilterClassProtocol
-
An opaque structure representing a watched
GtkExpression.The contents of
GtkExpressionWatchshould only be accessed through the provided API.The
See moreExpressionWatchProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkExpressionWatchinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeExpressionWatch. Alternatively, useExpressionWatchRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ExpressionWatchProtocol
-
The
See moreFileChooserNativeClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileChooserNativeClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileChooserNativeClass. Alternatively, useFileChooserNativeClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileChooserNativeClassProtocol
-
The
GtkEmojiChooseris used by text widgets such asGtkEntryorGtkTextViewto let users insert Emoji characters.
GtkEmojiChooseremits the [signalGtk.EmojiChooser::emoji-picked] signal when an Emoji is selected.CSS nodes
popover ├── box.emoji-searchbar │ ╰── entry.search ╰── box.emoji-toolbar ├── button.image-button.emoji-section ├── ... ╰── button.image-button.emoji-sectionEvery
GtkEmojiChooserconsists of a main node called popover. The contents of the popover are largely implementation defined and supposed to inherit general styles. The top searchbar used to search emoji and gets the .emoji-searchbar style class itself. The bottom toolbar used to switch between different emoji categories consists of buttons with the .emoji-section style class and gets the .emoji-toolbar style class itself.The
See moreEmojiChooserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEmojiChooserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEmojiChooser. Alternatively, useEmojiChooserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EmojiChooserProtocol : PopoverProtocol
-
GtkEntryis a single line text entry widget.
A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.
When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using [method
Gtk.Entry.set_visibility]. In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with [methodGtk.Entry.set_invisible_char].GtkEntryhas the ability to display progress or activity information behind the text. To make an entry display such information, use [methodGtk.Entry.set_progress_fraction] or [methodGtk.Entry.set_progress_pulse_step].Additionally,
GtkEntrycan show icons at either side of the entry. These icons can be activatable by clicking, can be set up as drag source and can have tooltips. To add an icon, use [methodGtk.Entry.set_icon_from_gicon] or one of the various other functions that set an icon from an icon name or a paintable. To trigger an action when the user clicks an icon, connect to the [signalGtk.Entry::icon-press] signal. To allow DND operations from an icon, use [methodGtk.Entry.set_icon_drag_source]. To set a tooltip on an icon, use [methodGtk.Entry.set_icon_tooltip_text] or the corresponding function for markup.Note that functionality or information that is only available by clicking on an icon in an entry may not be accessible at all to users which are not able to use a mouse or other pointing device. It is therefore recommended that any such functionality should also be available by other means, e.g. via the context menu of the entry.
CSS nodes
entry[.flat][.warning][.error] ├── text[.readonly] ├── image.left ├── image.right ╰── [progress[.pulse]]GtkEntryhas a main node with the name entry. Depending on the properties of the entry, the style classes .read-only and .flat may appear. The style classes .warning and .error may also be used with entries.When the entry shows icons, it adds subnodes with the name image and the style class .left or .right, depending on where the icon appears.
When the entry shows progress, it adds a subnode with the name progress. The node has the style class .pulse when the shown progress is pulsing.
For all the subnodes added to the text node in various situations, see [class
Gtk.Text].GtkEntry as GtkBuildable
The
GtkEntryimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specifyPangoAttributevalues for this label.An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
<object class="GtkEntry"> <attributes> <attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/> <attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/> </attributes> </object>The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.
Accessibility
GtkEntryuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOXrole.The
See moreEntryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEntryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEntry. Alternatively, useEntryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EntryProtocol : CellEditableProtocol, EditableProtocol
-
A
GtkEntryBufferhold the text displayed in aGtkTextwidget.A single
GtkEntryBufferobject can be shared by multiple widgets which will then share the same text content, but not the cursor position, visibility attributes, icon etc.GtkEntryBuffermay be derived from. Such a derived class might allow text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory, useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.The
See moreEntryBufferProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEntryBufferinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEntryBuffer. Alternatively, useEntryBufferRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EntryBufferProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkEntryCompletionis an auxiliary object to provide completion functionality forGtkEntry.It implements the [iface
Gtk.CellLayout] interface, to allow the user to add extra cells to theGtkTreeViewwith completion matches.“Completion functionality” means that when the user modifies the text in the entry,
GtkEntryCompletionchecks which rows in the model match the current content of the entry, and displays a list of matches. By default, the matching is done by comparing the entry text case-insensitively against the text column of the model (see [methodGtk.EntryCompletion.set_text_column]), but this can be overridden with a custom match function (see [methodGtk.EntryCompletion.set_match_func]).When the user selects a completion, the content of the entry is updated. By default, the content of the entry is replaced by the text column of the model, but this can be overridden by connecting to the [signal
Gtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected] signal and updating the entry in the signal handler. Note that you should returntruefrom the signal handler to suppress the default behaviour.To add completion functionality to an entry, use [method
Gtk.Entry.set_completion].GtkEntryCompletionuses a [classGtk.TreeModelFilter] model to represent the subset of the entire model that is currently matching. While theGtkEntryCompletionsignals [signalGtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected] and [signalGtk.EntryCompletion::cursor-on-match] take the original model and an iter pointing to that model as arguments, other callbacks and signals (such asGtkCellLayoutDataFuncor [signalGtk.CellArea::apply-attributes)] will generally take the filter model as argument. As long as you are only calling [methodGtk.TreeModel.get], this will make no difference to you. If for some reason, you need the original model, use [methodGtk.TreeModelFilter.get_model]. Don’t forget to use [methodGtk.TreeModelFilter.convert_iter_to_child_iter] to obtain a matching iter.The
See moreEntryCompletionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEntryCompletioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEntryCompletion. Alternatively, useEntryCompletionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EntryCompletionProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol, CellLayoutProtocol
-
GtkEventControlleris the base class for event controllers.These are ancillary objects associated to widgets, which react to
GdkEvents, and possibly trigger actions as a consequence.Event controllers are added to a widget with [method
Gtk.Widget.add_controller]. It is rarely necessary to explicitly remove a controller with [methodGtk.Widget.remove_controller].See the chapter on input handling for an overview of the basic concepts, such as the capture and bubble phases of even propagation.
The
See moreEventControllerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventController. Alternatively, useEventControllerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkEventControllerFocusis an event controller to keep track of keyboard focus.The event controller offers [signal
Gtk.EventControllerFocus::enter] and [signalGtk.EventControllerFocus::leave] signals, as well as [propertyGtk.EventControllerFocus:is-focus] and [propertyGtk.EventControllerFocus:contains-focus] properties which are updated to reflect focus changes inside the widget hierarchy that is rooted at the controllers widget.The
See moreEventControllerFocusProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerFocusinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerFocus. Alternatively, useEventControllerFocusRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerFocusProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkEventControllerKeyis an event controller that provides access to key events.The
See moreEventControllerKeyProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerKeyinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerKey. Alternatively, useEventControllerKeyRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerKeyProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkEventControllerLegacyis an event controller that provides raw access to the event stream.It should only be used as a last resort if none of the other event controllers or gestures do the job.
The
See moreEventControllerLegacyProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerLegacyinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerLegacy. Alternatively, useEventControllerLegacyRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerLegacyProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkEventControllerMotionis an event controller tracking the pointer position.The event controller offers [signal
Gtk.EventControllerMotion::enter] and [signalGtk.EventControllerMotion::leave] signals, as well as [propertyGtk.EventControllerMotion:is-pointer] and [propertyGtk.EventControllerMotion:contains-pointer] properties which are updated to reflect changes in the pointer position as it moves over the widget.The
See moreEventControllerMotionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerMotioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerMotion. Alternatively, useEventControllerMotionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerMotionProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkEventControllerScrollis an event controller that handles scroll events.It is capable of handling both discrete and continuous scroll events from mice or touchpads, abstracting them both with the [signal
Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll] signal. Deltas in the discrete case are multiples of 1.In the case of continuous scroll events,
GtkEventControllerScrollencloses all [signalGtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll] emissions between two [signalGtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-begin] and [signalGtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-end] signals.The behavior of the event controller can be modified by the flags given at creation time, or modified at a later point through method
Gtk.EventControllerScroll.set_flags.The controller can be set up to emit motion for either/both vertical and horizontal scroll events through
GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_VERTICAL,GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_HORIZONTALandGTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_BOTH_AXES. If any axis is disabled, the respective [signalGtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll] delta will be 0. Vertical scroll events will be translated to horizontal motion for the devices incapable of horizontal scrolling.The event controller can also be forced to emit discrete events on all devices through
GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_DISCRETE. This can be used to implement discrete actions triggered through scroll events (e.g. switching across combobox options).The
GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETICflag toggles the emission of the [signalGtk.EventControllerScroll::decelerate] signal, emitted at the end of scrolling with two X/Y velocity arguments that are consistent with the motion that was received.The
See moreEventControllerScrollProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEventControllerScrollinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEventControllerScroll. Alternatively, useEventControllerScrollRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EventControllerScrollProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkEveryFiltermatches an item when each of its filters matches.To add filters to a
GtkEveryFilter, use [methodGtk.MultiFilter.append].The
See moreEveryFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkEveryFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeEveryFilter. Alternatively, useEveryFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol EveryFilterProtocol : MultiFilterProtocol
-
GtkExpanderallows the user to reveal its child by clicking on an expander triangle.
This is similar to the triangles used in a
GtkTreeView.Normally you use an expander as you would use a frame; you create the child widget and use [method
Gtk.Expander.set_child] to add it to the expander. When the expander is toggled, it will take care of showing and hiding the child automatically.Special Usage
There are situations in which you may prefer to show and hide the expanded widget yourself, such as when you want to actually create the widget at expansion time. In this case, create a
GtkExpanderbut do not add a child to it. The expander widget has an [propertyGtk.Expander:expanded[ property which can be used to monitor its expansion state. You should watch this property with a signal connection as follows:static void expander_callback (GObject *object, GParamSpec *param_spec, gpointer user_data) { GtkExpander *expander; expander = GTK_EXPANDER (object); if (gtk_expander_get_expanded (expander)) { // Show or create widgets } else { // Hide or destroy widgets } } static void create_expander (void) { GtkWidget *expander = gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic ("_More Options"); g_signal_connect (expander, "notify`expanded`", G_CALLBACK (expander_callback), NULL); // ... }GtkExpander as GtkBuildable
The
GtkExpanderimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkExpander:
<object class="GtkExpander"> <child type="label"> <object class="GtkLabel" id="expander-label"/> </child> <child> <object class="GtkEntry" id="expander-content"/> </child> </object>CSS nodes
expander ╰── box ├── title │ ├── arrow │ ╰── <label widget> ╰── <child>GtkExpanderhas three CSS nodes, the main node with the name expander, a subnode with name title and node below it with name arrow. The arrow of an expander that is showing its child gets the :checked pseudoclass added to it.Accessibility
GtkExpanderuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTONrole.The
See moreExpanderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkExpanderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeExpander. Alternatively, useExpanderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ExpanderProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkExpressionprovides a way to describe references to values.An important aspect of expressions is that the value can be obtained from a source that is several steps away. For example, an expression may describe ‘the value of property A of
object1, which is itself the value of a property ofobject2’. Andobject1may not even exist yet at the time that the expression is created. This is contrast toGObjectproperty bindings, which can only create direct connections between the properties of two objects that must both exist for the duration of the binding.An expression needs to be “evaluated” to obtain the value that it currently refers to. An evaluation always happens in the context of a current object called
this(it mirrors the behavior of object-oriented languages), which may or may not influence the result of the evaluation. Use [methodGtk.Expression.evaluate] for evaluating an expression.Various methods for defining expressions exist, from simple constants via [ctor
Gtk.ConstantExpression.new] to looking up properties in aGObject(even recursively) via [ctorGtk.PropertyExpression.new] or providing custom functions to transform and combine expressions via [ctorGtk.ClosureExpression.new].Here is an example of a complex expression:
color_expr = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_LIST_ITEM, NULL, "item"); expression = gtk_property_expression_new (GTK_TYPE_COLOR, color_expr, "name");when evaluated with
thisbeing aGtkListItem, it will obtain the “item” property from theGtkListItem, and then obtain the “name” property from the resulting object (which is assumed to be of typeGTK_TYPE_COLOR).A more concise way to describe this would be
this->item->nameThe most likely place where you will encounter expressions is in the context of list models and list widgets using them. For example,
GtkDropDownis evaluating aGtkExpressionto obtain strings from the items in its model that it can then use to match against the contents of its search entry.GtkStringFilteris using aGtkExpressionfor similar reasons.By default, expressions are not paying attention to changes and evaluation is just a snapshot of the current state at a given time. To get informed about changes, an expression needs to be “watched” via a [struct
Gtk.ExpressionWatch], which will cause a callback to be called whenever the value of the expression may have changed; [methodGtk.Expression.watch] starts watching an expression, and [methodGtk.ExpressionWatch.unwatch] stops.Watches can be created for automatically updating the property of an object, similar to GObject’s
GBindingmechanism, by using [methodGtk.Expression.bind].GtkExpression in GObject properties
In order to use a
GtkExpressionas aGObjectproperty, you must use the [idgtk_param_spec_expression] when creating aGParamSpecto install in theGObjectclass being defined; for instance:obj_props[PROP_EXPRESSION] = gtk_param_spec_expression ("expression", "Expression", "The expression used by the widget", G_PARAM_READWRITE | G_PARAM_STATIC_STRINGS | G_PARAM_EXPLICIT_NOTIFY);When implementing the
GObjectClass.set_propertyandGObjectClass.get_propertyvirtual functions, you must use [idgtk_value_get_expression], to retrieve the storedGtkExpressionfrom theGValuecontainer, and [idgtk_value_set_expression], to store theGtkExpressioninto theGValue; for instance:// in `set_property()`... case PROP_EXPRESSION: foo_widget_set_expression (foo, gtk_value_get_expression (value)); break; // in `get_property()`... case PROP_EXPRESSION: gtk_value_set_expression (value, foo->expression); break;GtkExpression in .ui files
GtkBuilderhas support for creating expressions. The syntax here can be used where aGtkExpressionobject is needed like in a<property>tag for an expression property, or in a<binding>tag to bind a property to an expression.To create an property expression, use the
<lookup>element. It can have atypeattribute to specify the object type, and anameattribute to specify the property to look up. The content of<lookup>can either be an element specfiying the expression to use the object, or a string that specifies the name of the object to use.Example:
<lookup name='search'>string_filter</lookup>To create a constant expression, use the
<constant>element. If the type attribute is specified, the element content is interpreted as a value of that type. Otherwise, it is assumed to be an object. For instance:<constant>string_filter</constant> <constant type='gchararray'>Hello, world</constant>To create a closure expression, use the
<closure>element. Thetypeandfunctionattributes specify what function to use for the closure, the content of the element contains the expressions for the parameters. For instance:<closure type='gchararray' function='combine_args_somehow'> <constant type='gchararray'>File size:</constant> <lookup type='GFile' name='size'>myfile</lookup> </closure>The
See moreExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeExpression. Alternatively, useExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ExpressionProtocol
-
GtkFileChooserDialogis a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save” commands.
This widget works by putting a [class
Gtk.FileChooserWidget] inside a [classGtk.Dialog]. It exposes the [ifaceGtk.FileChooser] interface, so you can use all of the [ifaceGtk.FileChooser] functions on the file chooser dialog as well as those for [classGtk.Dialog].Note that
GtkFileChooserDialogdoes not have any methods of its own. Instead, you should use the functions that work on a [ifaceGtk.FileChooser].If you want to integrate well with the platform you should use the [class
Gtk.FileChooserNative] API, which will use a platform-specific dialog if available and fall back toGtkFileChooserDialogotherwise.Typical usage
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use
GtkFileChooserDialogto select a file for opening:static void on_open_response (GtkDialog *dialog, int response) { if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT) { GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog); `g_autoptr(GFile)` file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser); open_file (file); } gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog)); } // ... GtkWidget *dialog; GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN; dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File", parent_window, action, `_("_Cancel")`, GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL, `_("_Open")`, GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT, NULL); gtk_widget_show (dialog); g_signal_connect (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_open_response), NULL);To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
static void on_save_response (GtkDialog *dialog, int response) { if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT) { GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog); `g_autoptr(GFile)` file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser); save_to_file (file); } gtk_window_destroy (GTK_WINDOW (dialog)); } // ... GtkWidget *dialog; GtkFileChooser *chooser; GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE; dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Save File", parent_window, action, `_("_Cancel")`, GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL, `_("_Save")`, GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT, NULL); chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog); if (user_edited_a_new_document) gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, `_("Untitled document")`); else gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_filename); gtk_widget_show (dialog); g_signal_connect (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_save_response), NULL);Setting up a file chooser dialog
There are various cases in which you may need to use a
GtkFileChooserDialog:To select a file for opening, use
GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.To save a file for the first time, use
GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE, and suggest a name such as “Untitled” with [methodGtk.FileChooser.set_current_name].To save a file under a different name, use
GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE, and set the existing file with [methodGtk.FileChooser.set_file].To choose a folder instead of a filem use
GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.
In general, you should only cause the file chooser to show a specific folder when it is appropriate to use [method
Gtk.FileChooser.set_file], i.e. when you are doing a “Save As” command and you already have a file saved somewhere.Response Codes
GtkFileChooserDialoginherits from [classGtk.Dialog], so buttons that go in its action area have response codes such asGTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPTandGTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL. For example, you could call [ctorGtk.FileChooserDialog.new] as follows:GtkWidget *dialog; GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN; dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File", parent_window, action, `_("_Cancel")`, GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL, `_("_Open")`, GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT, NULL);This will create buttons for “Cancel” and “Open” that use predefined response identifiers from [enum
Gtk.ResponseType]. For most dialog boxes you can use your own custom response codes rather than the ones in [enumGtk.ResponseType], butGtkFileChooserDialogassumes that its “accept”-type action, e.g. an “Open” or “Save” button, will have one of the following response codes:GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPTGTK_RESPONSE_OKGTK_RESPONSE_YESGTK_RESPONSE_APPLY
This is because
GtkFileChooserDialogmust intercept responses and switch to folders if appropriate, rather than letting the dialog terminate — the implementation uses these known response codes to know which responses can be blocked if appropriate.To summarize, make sure you use a predefined response code when you use
GtkFileChooserDialogto ensure proper operation.The
See moreFileChooserDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileChooserDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileChooserDialog. Alternatively, useFileChooserDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileChooserDialogProtocol : DialogProtocol, FileChooserProtocol
-
GtkFileChooseris an interface that can be implemented by file selection widgets.In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are [class
Gtk.FileChooserWidget] and [classGtk.FileChooserDialog].You do not need to write an object that implements the
GtkFileChooserinterface unless you are trying to adapt an existing file selector to expose a standard programming interface.GtkFileChooserallows for shortcuts to various places in the filesystem. In the default implementation these are displayed in the left pane. It may be a bit confusing at first that these shortcuts come from various sources and in various flavours, so lets explain the terminology here:Bookmarks: are created by the user, by dragging folders from the right pane to the left pane, or by using the “Add”. Bookmarks can be renamed and deleted by the user.
Shortcuts: can be provided by the application. For example, a Paint program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. Shortcuts cannot be modified by the user.
Volumes: are provided by the underlying filesystem abstraction. They are the “roots” of the filesystem.
File Names and Encodings
When the user is finished selecting files in a
GtkFileChooser, your program can get the selected filenames asGFiles.Adding options
You can add extra widgets to a file chooser to provide options that are not present in the default design, by using [method
Gtk.FileChooser.add_choice]. Each choice has an identifier and a user visible label; additionally, each choice can have multiple options. If a choice has no option, it will be rendered as a check button with the given label; if a choice has options, it will be rendered as a combo box.The
See moreFileChooserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileChooserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileChooser. Alternatively, useFileChooserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileChooserProtocol
-
GtkFontChooseris an interface that can be implemented by widgets for choosing fonts.In GTK, the main objects that implement this interface are [class
Gtk.FontChooserWidget], [classGtk.FontChooserDialog] and [classGtk.FontButton].The
See moreFontChooserProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFontChooserinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFontChooser. Alternatively, useFontChooserRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FontChooserProtocol
-
GtkNativeis the interface implemented by all widgets that have their ownGdkSurface.The obvious example of a
GtkNativeisGtkWindow.Every widget that is not itself a
GtkNativeis contained in one, and you can get it with [methodGtk.Widget.get_native].To get the surface of a
GtkNative, use [methodGtk.Native.get_surface]. It is also possible to find theGtkNativeto which a surface belongs, with [funcGtk.Native.get_for_surface].In addition to a [class
Gdk.Surface], aGtkNativealso provides a [classGsk.Renderer] for rendering on that surface. To get the renderer, use [methodGtk.Native.get_renderer].The
See moreNativeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNativeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNative. Alternatively, useNativeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NativeProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkFileChooserNativeis an abstraction of a dialog suitable for use with “File Open” or “File Save as” commands.By default, this just uses a
GtkFileChooserDialogto implement the actual dialog. However, on some platforms, such as Windows and macOS, the native platform file chooser is used instead. When the application is running in a sandboxed environment without direct filesystem access (such as Flatpak),GtkFileChooserNativemay call the proper APIs (portals) to let the user choose a file and make it available to the application.While the API of
GtkFileChooserNativeclosely mirrorsGtkFileChooserDialog, the main difference is that there is no access to anyGtkWindoworGtkWidgetfor the dialog. This is required, as there may not be one in the case of a platform native dialog.Showing, hiding and running the dialog is handled by the [class
Gtk.NativeDialog] functions.Note that unlike
GtkFileChooserDialog,GtkFileChooserNativeobjects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.Typical usage
In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use
GtkFileChooserNativeto select a file for opening:static void on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native, int response) { if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT) { GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native); GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser); open_file (file); g_object_unref (file); } g_object_unref (native); } // ... GtkFileChooserNative *native; GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN; native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Open File", parent_window, action, "_Open", "_Cancel"); g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL); gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));To use a
GtkFileChooserNativefor saving, you can use this:static void on_response (GtkNativeDialog *native, int response) { if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT) { GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native); GFile *file = gtk_file_chooser_get_file (chooser); save_to_file (file); g_object_unref (file); } g_object_unref (native); } // ... GtkFileChooserNative *native; GtkFileChooser *chooser; GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE; native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Save File", parent_window, action, "_Save", "_Cancel"); chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native); if (user_edited_a_new_document) gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, `_("Untitled document")`); else gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file, NULL); g_signal_connect (native, "response", G_CALLBACK (on_response), NULL); gtk_native_dialog_show (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));For more information on how to best set up a file dialog, see the [class
Gtk.FileChooserDialog] documentation.Response Codes
GtkFileChooserNativeinherits from [classGtk.NativeDialog], which means it will returnGTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPTif the user accepted, andGTK_RESPONSE_CANCELif he pressed cancel. It can also returnGTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENTif the window was unexpectedly closed.Differences from
GtkFileChooserDialogThere are a few things in the [iface
Gtk.FileChooser] interface that are not possible to use withGtkFileChooserNative, as such use would prohibit the use of a native dialog.No operations that change the dialog work while the dialog is visible. Set all the properties that are required before showing the dialog.
Win32 details
On windows the
IFileDialogimplementation (added in Windows Vista) is used. It supports many of the features thatGtkFileChooserhas, but there are some things it does not handle:- Any [class
Gtk.FileFilter] added using a mimetype
If any of these features are used the regular
GtkFileChooserDialogwill be used in place of the native one.Portal details
When the
org.freedesktop.portal.FileChooserportal is available on the session bus, it is used to bring up an out-of-process file chooser. Depending on the kind of session the application is running in, this may or may not be a GTK file chooser.macOS details
On macOS the
NSSavePanelandNSOpenPanelclasses are used to provide native file chooser dialogs. Some features provided byGtkFileChooserare not supported:- Shortcut folders.
The
See moreFileChooserNativeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileChooserNativeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileChooserNative. Alternatively, useFileChooserNativeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileChooserNativeProtocol : FileChooserProtocol, NativeDialogProtocol - Any [class
-
GtkFileChooserWidgetis a widget for choosing files.It exposes the [iface
Gtk.FileChooser] interface, and you should use the methods of this interface to interact with the widget.CSS nodes
GtkFileChooserWidgethas a single CSS node with name filechooser.The
See moreFileChooserWidgetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileChooserWidgetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileChooserWidget. Alternatively, useFileChooserWidgetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileChooserWidgetProtocol : FileChooserProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkFileFilterfilters files by name or mime type.GtkFileFiltercan be used to restrict the files being shown in aGtkFileChooser. Files can be filtered based on their name (with [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_pattern] or [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_suffix]) or on their mime type (with [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_mime_type]).Filtering by mime types handles aliasing and subclassing of mime types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain. Note that
GtkFileFilterallows wildcards for the subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/*.Normally, file filters are used by adding them to a
GtkFileChooser(see [methodGtk.FileChooser.add_filter]), but it is also possible to manually use a file filter on any [classGtk.FilterListModel] containingGFileInfoobjects.GtkFileFilter as GtkBuildable
The
GtkFileFilterimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports adding rules using the<mime-types>and<patterns>and<suffixes>elements and listing the rules within. Specifying a<mime-type>or<pattern>or<suffix>has the same effect as as calling [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_mime_type] or [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_pattern] or [methodGtk.FileFilter.add_suffix].An example of a UI definition fragment specifying
GtkFileFilterrules:<object class="GtkFileFilter"> <property name="name" translatable="yes">Text and Images</property> <mime-types> <mime-type>text/plain</mime-type> <mime-type>image/ *</mime-type> </mime-types> <patterns> <pattern>*.txt</pattern> </patterns> <suffixes> <suffix>png</suffix> </suffixes> </object>The
See moreFileFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFileFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFileFilter. Alternatively, useFileFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FileFilterProtocol : BuildableProtocol, FilterProtocol
-
A
GtkFilterobject describes the filtering to be performed by aGtkFilterListModel.The model will use the filter to determine if it should include items or not by calling [method
Gtk.Filter.match] for each item and only keeping the ones that the function returnstruefor.Filters may change what items they match through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the [signal
Gtk.Filter::changed] signal to notify that previous filter results are no longer valid and that items should be checked again via [methodGtk.Filter.match].GTK provides various pre-made filter implementations for common filtering operations. These filters often include properties that can be linked to various widgets to easily allow searches.
However, in particular for large lists or complex search methods, it is also possible to subclass
GtkFilterand provide one’s own filter.The
See moreFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFilter. Alternatively, useFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FilterProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkFilterListModelis a list model that filters the elements of the underlying model according to aGtkFilter.It hides some elements from the other model according to criteria given by a
GtkFilter.The model can be set up to do incremental searching, so that filtering long lists doesn’t block the UI. See [method
Gtk.FilterListModel.set_incremental] for details.The
See moreFilterListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFilterListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFilterListModel. Alternatively, useFilterListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FilterListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkFixedplaces its child widgets at fixed positions and with fixed sizes.GtkFixedperforms no automatic layout management.For most applications, you should not use this container! It keeps you from having to learn about the other GTK containers, but it results in broken applications. With
GtkFixed, the following things will result in truncated text, overlapping widgets, and other display bugs:Themes, which may change widget sizes.
Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.
In addition,
GtkFixeddoes not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately for the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language, but it can’t do that withGtkFixed. So if you need to reorder widgets depending on the text direction, you would need to manually detect it and adjust child positions accordingly.Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.
If you know none of these things are an issue for your application, and prefer the simplicity of
GtkFixed, by all means use the widget. But you should be aware of the tradeoffs.The
See moreFixedProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixed. Alternatively, useFixedRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkFixedLayoutis a layout manager which can place child widgets at fixed positions.Most applications should never use this layout manager; fixed positioning and sizing requires constant recalculations on where children need to be positioned and sized. Other layout managers perform this kind of work internally so that application developers don’t need to do it. Specifically, widgets positioned in a fixed layout manager will need to take into account:
Themes, which may change widget sizes.
Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also, display of non-English text will use a different font in many cases.
In addition,
GtkFixedLayoutdoes not pay attention to text direction and thus may produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK will order containers appropriately depending on the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the thing they label when using an RTL language;GtkFixedLayoutwon’t be able to do that for you.Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove UI elements, since you have to reposition all the other elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your application.
The
See moreFixedLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixedLayout. Alternatively, useFixedLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
GtkLayoutChildsubclass for children in aGtkFixedLayout.The
See moreFixedLayoutChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedLayoutChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixedLayoutChild. Alternatively, useFixedLayoutChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedLayoutChildProtocol : LayoutChildProtocol
-
GtkFlattenListModelis a list model that concatenates other list models.GtkFlattenListModeltakes a list model containing list models, and flattens it into a single model.The
See moreFlattenListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFlattenListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFlattenListModel. Alternatively, useFlattenListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FlattenListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkFlowBoxputs child widgets in reflowing grid.For instance, with the horizontal orientation, the widgets will be arranged from left to right, starting a new row under the previous row when necessary. Reducing the width in this case will require more rows, so a larger height will be requested.
Likewise, with the vertical orientation, the widgets will be arranged from top to bottom, starting a new column to the right when necessary. Reducing the height will require more columns, so a larger width will be requested.
The size request of a
GtkFlowBoxalone may not be what you expect; if you need to be able to shrink it along both axes and dynamically reflow its children, you may have to wrap it in aGtkScrolledWindowto enable that.The children of a
GtkFlowBoxcan be dynamically sorted and filtered.Although a
GtkFlowBoxmust have onlyGtkFlowBoxChildchildren, you can add any kind of widget to it via [methodGtk.FlowBox.insert], and aGtkFlowBoxChildwidget will automatically be inserted between the box and the widget.Also see [class
Gtk.ListBox].CSS nodes
flowbox ├── flowboxchild │ ╰── <child> ├── flowboxchild │ ╰── <child> ┊ ╰── [rubberband]GtkFlowBoxuses a single CSS node with name flowbox.GtkFlowBoxChilduses a single CSS node with name flowboxchild. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.Accessibility
GtkFlowBoxuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRIDrole, andGtkFlowBoxChilduses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELLrole.The
See moreFlowBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFlowBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFlowBox. Alternatively, useFlowBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FlowBoxProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkFlowBoxChildis the kind of widget that can be added to aGtkFlowBox.The
See moreFlowBoxChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFlowBoxChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFlowBoxChild. Alternatively, useFlowBoxChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FlowBoxChildProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
The
GtkFontButtonallows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font.
It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.
CSS nodes
fontbutton ╰── button.font ╰── [content]GtkFontButtonhas a single CSS node with name fontbutton which contains a button node with the .font style class.The
See moreFontButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFontButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFontButton. Alternatively, useFontButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FontButtonProtocol : FontChooserProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
The
GtkFontChooserDialogwidget is a dialog for selecting a font.
GtkFontChooserDialogimplements the [ifaceGtk.FontChooser] interface and does not provide much API of its own.To create a
GtkFontChooserDialog, use [ctorGtk.FontChooserDialog.new].GtkFontChooserDialog as GtkBuildable
The
GtkFontChooserDialogimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface exposes the buttons with the names “select_button” and “cancel_button”.The
See moreFontChooserDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFontChooserDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFontChooserDialog. Alternatively, useFontChooserDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FontChooserDialogProtocol : DialogProtocol, FontChooserProtocol
-
The
GtkFontChooserWidgetwidget lets the user select a font.It is used in the
GtkFontChooserDialogwidget to provide a dialog for selecting fonts.To set the font which is initially selected, use [method
Gtk.FontChooser.set_font] or [methodGtk.FontChooser.set_font_desc].To get the selected font use [method
Gtk.FontChooser.get_font] or [methodGtk.FontChooser.get_font_desc].To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use [method
Gtk.FontChooser.set_preview_text].CSS nodes
GtkFontChooserWidgethas a single CSS node with name fontchooser.The
See moreFontChooserWidgetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFontChooserWidgetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFontChooserWidget. Alternatively, useFontChooserWidgetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FontChooserWidgetProtocol : FontChooserProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkFrameis a widget that surrounds its child with a decorative frame and an optional label.
If present, the label is drawn inside the top edge of the frame. The horizontal position of the label can be controlled with [method
Gtk.Frame.set_label_align].GtkFrameclips its child. You can use this to add rounded corners to widgets, but be aware that it also cuts off shadows.GtkFrame as GtkBuildable
The
GtkFrameimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. A normal content child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkFrame:
<object class="GtkFrame"> <child type="label"> <object class="GtkLabel" id="frame_label"/> </child> <child> <object class="GtkEntry" id="frame_content"/> </child> </object>CSS nodes
frame ├── <label widget> ╰── <child>GtkFramehas a main CSS node with name “frame”, which is used to draw the visible border. You can set the appearance of the border using CSS properties like “border-style” on this node.The
See moreFrameProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFrameinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFrame. Alternatively, useFrameRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FrameProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkGLAreais a widget that allows drawing with OpenGL.
GtkGLAreasets up its own [classGdk.GLContext], and creates a custom GL framebuffer that the widget will do GL rendering onto. It also ensures that this framebuffer is the default GL rendering target when rendering.In order to draw, you have to connect to the [signal
Gtk.GLArea::render] signal, or subclassGtkGLAreaand override the GtkGLAreaClass.render virtual function.The
GtkGLAreawidget ensures that theGdkGLContextis associated with the widget’s drawing area, and it is kept updated when the size and position of the drawing area changes.Drawing with GtkGLArea
The simplest way to draw using OpenGL commands in a
GtkGLAreais to create a widget instance and connect to the [signalGtk.GLArea::render] signal:The
render()function will be called when theGtkGLAreais ready for you to draw its content:static gboolean render (GtkGLArea *area, GdkGLContext *context) { // inside this function it's safe to use GL; the given // GdkGLContext has been made current to the drawable // surface used by the `GtkGLArea` and the viewport has // already been set to be the size of the allocation // we can start by clearing the buffer glClearColor (0, 0, 0, 0); glClear (GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT); // draw your object // draw_an_object (); // we completed our drawing; the draw commands will be // flushed at the end of the signal emission chain, and // the buffers will be drawn on the window return TRUE; } void setup_glarea (void) { // create a GtkGLArea instance GtkWidget *gl_area = gtk_gl_area_new (); // connect to the "render" signal g_signal_connect (gl_area, "render", G_CALLBACK (render), NULL); }If you need to initialize OpenGL state, e.g. buffer objects or shaders, you should use the [signal
Gtk.Widget::realize] signal; you can use the [signalGtk.Widget::unrealize] signal to clean up. Since theGdkGLContextcreation and initialization may fail, you will need to check for errors, using [methodGtk.GLArea.get_error].An example of how to safely initialize the GL state is:
static void on_realize (GtkGLarea *area) { // We need to make the context current if we want to // call GL API gtk_gl_area_make_current (area); // If there were errors during the initialization or // when trying to make the context current, this // function will return a GError for you to catch if (gtk_gl_area_get_error (area) != NULL) return; // You can also use `gtk_gl_area_set_error()` in order // to show eventual initialization errors on the // GtkGLArea widget itself GError *internal_error = NULL; init_buffer_objects (&error); if (error != NULL) { gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error); g_error_free (error); return; } init_shaders (&error); if (error != NULL) { gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error); g_error_free (error); return; } }If you need to change the options for creating the
GdkGLContextyou should use the [signalGtk.GLArea::create-context] signal.The
See moreGLAreaProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGLAreainstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGLArea. Alternatively, useGLAreaRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GLAreaProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
The
See moreFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFilterClass. Alternatively, useFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFilterListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFilterListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFilterListModelClass. Alternatively, useFilterListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FilterListModelClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFixedClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixedClass. Alternatively, useFixedClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFixedLayoutChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedLayoutChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixedLayoutChildClass. Alternatively, useFixedLayoutChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedLayoutChildClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFixedLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFixedLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFixedLayoutClass. Alternatively, useFixedLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FixedLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFlattenListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFlattenListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFlattenListModelClass. Alternatively, useFlattenListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FlattenListModelClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFlowBoxChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFlowBoxChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFlowBoxChildClass. Alternatively, useFlowBoxChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FlowBoxChildClassProtocol
-
The
See moreFontChooserIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFontChooserIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFontChooserIface. Alternatively, useFontChooserIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FontChooserIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreFrameClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkFrameClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeFrameClass. Alternatively, useFrameClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol FrameClassProtocol
-
The
GtkGLAreaClassstructure contains only private data.The
See moreGLAreaClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGLAreaClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGLAreaClass. Alternatively, useGLAreaClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GLAreaClassProtocol
-
GtkGestureis the base class for gesture recognition.Although
GtkGestureis quite generalized to serve as a base for multi-touch gestures, it is suitable to implement single-touch and pointer-based gestures (using the specialnilGdkEventSequencevalue for these).The number of touches that a
GtkGestureneed to be recognized is controlled by the [propertyGtk.Gesture:n-points] property, if a gesture is keeping track of less or more than that number of sequences, it won’t check whether the gesture is recognized.As soon as the gesture has the expected number of touches, it will check regularly if it is recognized, the criteria to consider a gesture as “recognized” is left to
GtkGesturesubclasses.A recognized gesture will then emit the following signals:
- [signal
Gtk.Gesture::begin] when the gesture is recognized. - [signal
Gtk.Gesture::update], whenever an input event is processed. - [signal
Gtk.Gesture::end] when the gesture is no longer recognized.
Event propagation
In order to receive events, a gesture needs to set a propagation phase through [method
Gtk.EventController.set_propagation_phase].In the capture phase, events are propagated from the toplevel down to the target widget, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with the event before it reaches the target.
In the bubble phase, events are propagated up from the target widget to the toplevel, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get a chance to interact with events that have not been handled yet.
States of a sequence
Whenever input interaction happens, a single event may trigger a cascade of
GtkGestures, both across the parents of the widget receiving the event and in parallel within an individual widget. It is a responsibility of the widgets using those gestures to set the state of touch sequences accordingly in order to enable cooperation of gestures around theGdkEventSequences triggering those.Within a widget, gestures can be grouped through [method
Gtk.Gesture.group]. Grouped gestures synchronize the state of sequences, so calling [methodGtk.Gesture.set_sequence_state] on one will effectively propagate the state throughout the group.By default, all sequences start out in the
GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONEstate, sequences in this state trigger the gesture event handler, but event propagation will continue unstopped by gestures.If a sequence enters into the
GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIEDstate, the gesture group will effectively ignore the sequence, letting events go unstopped through the gesture, but the “slot” will still remain occupied while the touch is active.If a sequence enters in the
GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMEDstate, the gesture group will grab all interaction on the sequence, by:- Setting the same sequence to
GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIEDon every other gesture group within the widget, and every gesture on parent widgets in the propagation chain. - Emitting [signal
Gtk.Gesture::cancel] on every gesture in widgets underneath in the propagation chain. - Stopping event propagation after the gesture group handles the event.
Note: if a sequence is set early to
GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMEDonGDK_TOUCH_BEGIN/GDK_BUTTON_PRESS(so those events are captured before reaching the event widget, this impliesGTK_PHASE_CAPTURE), one similar event will emulated if the sequence changes toGTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED. This way event coherence is preserved before event propagation is unstopped again.Sequence states can’t be changed freely. See [method
Gtk.Gesture.set_sequence_state] to know about the possible lifetimes of aGdkEventSequence.Touchpad gestures
On the platforms that support it,
GtkGesturewill handle transparently touchpad gesture events. The only precautions users ofGtkGestureshould do to enable this support are:- If the gesture has
GTK_PHASE_NONE, ensuring events of typeGDK_TOUCHPAD_SWIPEandGDK_TOUCHPAD_PINCHare handled by theGtkGesture
The
See moreGestureProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGesture. Alternatively, useGestureRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureProtocol : EventControllerProtocol - [signal
-
GtkGestureClickis aGtkGestureimplementation for clicks.It is able to recognize multiple clicks on a nearby zone, which can be listened for through the [signal
Gtk.GestureClick::pressed] signal. Whenever time or distance between clicks exceed the GTK defaults, [signalGtk.GestureClick::stopped] is emitted, and the click counter is reset.The
See moreGestureClickProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureClickinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureClick. Alternatively, useGestureClickRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureClickProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkGestureDragis aGtkGestureimplementation for drags.The drag operation itself can be tracked throughout the [signal
Gtk.GestureDrag::drag-begin], [signalGtk.GestureDrag::drag-update] and [signalGtk.GestureDrag::drag-end] signals, and the relevant coordinates can be extracted through [methodGtk.GestureDrag.get_offset] and [methodGtk.GestureDrag.get_start_point].The
See moreGestureDragProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureDraginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureDrag. Alternatively, useGestureDragRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureDragProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkGestureLongPressis aGtkGesturefor long presses.This gesture is also known as “Press and Hold”.
When the timeout is exceeded, the gesture is triggering the [signal
Gtk.GestureLongPress::pressed] signal.If the touchpoint is lifted before the timeout passes, or if it drifts too far of the initial press point, the [signal
Gtk.GestureLongPress::cancelled] signal will be emitted.How long the timeout is before the
pressedsignal gets emitted is determined by the [propertyGtk.Settings:gtk-long-press-time] setting. It can be modified by the [propertyGtk.GestureLongPress:delay-factor] property.The
See moreGestureLongPressProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureLongPressinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureLongPress. Alternatively, useGestureLongPressRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureLongPressProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkGesturePanis aGtkGesturefor pan gestures.These are drags that are locked to happen along one axis. The axis that a
GtkGesturePanhandles is defined at construct time, and can be changed through [methodGtk.GesturePan.set_orientation].When the gesture starts to be recognized,
GtkGesturePanwill attempt to determine as early as possible whether the sequence is moving in the expected direction, and denying the sequence if this does not happen.Once a panning gesture along the expected axis is recognized, the [signal
Gtk.GesturePan::pan] signal will be emitted as input events are received, containing the offset in the given axis.The
See moreGesturePanProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGesturePaninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGesturePan. Alternatively, useGesturePanRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GesturePanProtocol : GestureDragProtocol
-
GtkGestureRotateis aGtkGesturefor 2-finger rotations.Whenever the angle between both handled sequences changes, the [signal
Gtk.GestureRotate::angle-changed] signal is emitted.The
See moreGestureRotateProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureRotateinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureRotate. Alternatively, useGestureRotateRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureRotateProtocol : GestureProtocol
-
GtkGestureSingleis aGtkGesturessubclass optimized for singe-touch and mouse gestures.Under interaction, these gestures stick to the first interacting sequence, which is accessible through [method
Gtk.GestureSingle.get_current_sequence] while the gesture is being interacted with.By default gestures react to both
GDK_BUTTON_PRIMARYand touch events. [methodGtk.GestureSingle.set_touch_only] can be used to change the touch behavior. Callers may also specify a different mouse button number to interact with through [methodGtk.GestureSingle.set_button], or react to any mouse button by setting it to 0. While the gesture is active, the button being currently pressed can be known through [methodGtk.GestureSingle.get_current_button].The
See moreGestureSingleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureSingleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureSingle. Alternatively, useGestureSingleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureSingleProtocol : GestureProtocol
-
GtkGestureStylusis aGtkGesturespecific to stylus input.The provided signals just relay the basic information of the stylus events.
The
See moreGestureStylusProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureStylusinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureStylus. Alternatively, useGestureStylusRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureStylusProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkGestureSwipeis aGtkGesturefor swipe gestures.After a press/move/…/move/release sequence happens, the [signal
Gtk.GestureSwipe::swipe] signal will be emitted, providing the velocity and directionality of the sequence at the time it was lifted.If the velocity is desired in intermediate points, [method
Gtk.GestureSwipe.get_velocity] can be called in a [signalGtk.Gesture::update] handler.All velocities are reported in pixels/sec units.
The
See moreGestureSwipeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureSwipeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureSwipe. Alternatively, useGestureSwipeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureSwipeProtocol : GestureSingleProtocol
-
GtkGestureZoomis aGtkGesturefor 2-finger pinch/zoom gestures.Whenever the distance between both tracked sequences changes, the [signal
Gtk.GestureZoom::scale-changed] signal is emitted to report the scale factor.The
See moreGestureZoomProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureZoominstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureZoom. Alternatively, useGestureZoomRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureZoomProtocol : GestureProtocol
-
GtkGridis a container which arranges its child widgets in rows and columns.
It supports arbitrary positions and horizontal/vertical spans.
Children are added using [method
Gtk.Grid.attach]. They can span multiple rows or columns. It is also possible to add a child next to an existing child, using [methodGtk.Grid.attach_next_to]. To remove a child from the grid, use [methodGtk.Grid.remove].The behaviour of
GtkGridwhen several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.GtkGrid as GtkBuildable
Every child in a
GtkGridhas access to a custom [ifaceGtk.Buildable] element, called<layout>. It can by used to specify a position in the grid and optionally spans. All properties that can be used in the<layout>element are implemented by [classGtk.GridLayoutChild].It is implemented by
GtkWidgetusing [classGtk.LayoutManager].To showcase it, here is a simple example:
<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid"> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="button1"> <property name="label">Button 1</property> <layout> <property name="column">0</property> <property name="row">0</property> </layout> </object> </child> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="button2"> <property name="label">Button 2</property> <layout> <property name="column">1</property> <property name="row">0</property> </layout> </object> </child> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="button3"> <property name="label">Button 3</property> <layout> <property name="column">2</property> <property name="row">0</property> <property name="row-span">2</property> </layout> </object> </child> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="button4"> <property name="label">Button 4</property> <layout> <property name="column">0</property> <property name="row">1</property> <property name="column-span">2</property> </layout> </object> </child> </object>It organizes the first two buttons side-by-side in one cell each. The third button is in the last column but spans across two rows. This is defined by the
row-spanproperty. The last button is located in the second row and spans across two columns, which is defined by thecolumn-spanproperty.CSS nodes
GtkGriduses a single CSS node with namegrid.Accessibility
GtkGriduses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreGridProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGrid. Alternatively, useGridRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkGridLayoutis a layout manager which arranges child widgets in rows and columns.Children have an “attach point” defined by the horizontal and vertical index of the cell they occupy; children can span multiple rows or columns. The layout properties for setting the attach points and spans are set using the [class
Gtk.GridLayoutChild] associated to each child widget.The behaviour of
GtkGridLayoutwhen several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.GtkGridLayoutcan be used like aGtkBoxLayoutif all children are attached to the same row or column; however, if you only ever need a single row or column, you should consider usingGtkBoxLayout.The
See moreGridLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridLayout. Alternatively, useGridLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
GtkLayoutChildsubclass for children in aGtkGridLayout.The
See moreGridLayoutChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridLayoutChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridLayoutChild. Alternatively, useGridLayoutChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridLayoutChildProtocol : LayoutChildProtocol
-
GtkGridViewpresents a large dynamic grid of items.GtkGridViewuses its factory to generate one child widget for each visible item and shows them in a grid. The orientation of the grid view determines if the grid reflows vertically or horizontally.GtkGridViewallows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on rubberband selection, using [propertyGtk.GridView:enable-rubberband].To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
CSS nodes
gridview ├── child[.activatable] │ ├── child[.activatable] │ ┊ ╰── [rubberband]GtkGridViewuses a single CSS node with namegridview. Each child uses a single CSS node with namechild. If the [propertyGtk.ListItem:activatable] property is set, the corresponding row will have the.activatablestyle class. For rubberband selection, a subnode with namerubberbandis used.Accessibility
GtkGridViewuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRIDrole, and the items use theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GRID_CELLrole.The
See moreGridViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridView. Alternatively, useGridViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridViewProtocol : ListBaseProtocol
-
GtkHeaderBaris a widget for creating custom title bars for windows.
GtkHeaderBaris similar to a horizontalGtkCenterBox. It allows children to be placed at the start or the end. In addition, it allows the window title to be displayed. The title will be centered with respect to the width of the box, even if the children at either side take up different amounts of space.GtkHeaderBarcan add typical window frame controls, such as minimize, maximize and close buttons, or the window icon.For these reasons,
GtkHeaderBaris the natural choice for use as the custom titlebar widget of aGtkWindow (see [methodGtk.Window.set_titlebar`]), as it gives features typical of titlebars while allowing the addition of child widgets.GtkHeaderBar as GtkBuildable
The
GtkHeaderBarimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports adding children at the start or end sides by specifying “start” or “end” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element, or setting the title widget by specifying “title” value.By default the
GtkHeaderBaruses aGtkLabeldisplaying the title of the window it is contained in as the title widget, equivalent to the following UI definition:<object class="GtkHeaderBar"> <property name="title-widget"> <object class="GtkLabel"> <property name="label" translatable="yes">Label</property> <property name="single-line-mode">True</property> <property name="ellipsize">end</property> <property name="width-chars">5</property> <style> <class name="title"/> </style> </object> </property> </object>CSS nodes
headerbar ╰── windowhandle ╰── box ├── box.start │ ├── windowcontrols.start │ ╰── [other children] ├── [Title Widget] ╰── box.end ├── [other children] ╰── windowcontrols.endA
GtkHeaderBar‘s CSS node is calledheaderbar. It contains awindowhandlesubnode, which contains aboxsubnode, which contains twoboxsubnodes at the start and end of the header bar, as well as a center node that represents the title.Each of the boxes contains a
windowcontrolssubnode, see [classGtk.WindowControls] for details, as well as other children.Accessibility
GtkHeaderBaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreHeaderBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkHeaderBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeHeaderBar. Alternatively, useHeaderBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol HeaderBarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureClass. Alternatively, useGestureClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureClickClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureClickClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureClickClass. Alternatively, useGestureClickClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureClickClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureDragClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureDragClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureDragClass. Alternatively, useGestureDragClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureDragClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureLongPressClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureLongPressClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureLongPressClass. Alternatively, useGestureLongPressClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureLongPressClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGesturePanClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGesturePanClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGesturePanClass. Alternatively, useGesturePanClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GesturePanClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureRotateClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureRotateClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureRotateClass. Alternatively, useGestureRotateClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureRotateClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureSingleClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureSingleClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureSingleClass. Alternatively, useGestureSingleClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureSingleClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureStylusClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureStylusClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureStylusClass. Alternatively, useGestureStylusClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureStylusClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureSwipeClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureSwipeClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureSwipeClass. Alternatively, useGestureSwipeClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureSwipeClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGestureZoomClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGestureZoomClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGestureZoomClass. Alternatively, useGestureZoomClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GestureZoomClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGridClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridClass. Alternatively, useGridClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGridLayoutChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridLayoutChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridLayoutChildClass. Alternatively, useGridLayoutChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridLayoutChildClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGridLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridLayoutClass. Alternatively, useGridLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridLayoutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreGridViewClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkGridViewClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeGridViewClass. Alternatively, useGridViewClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol GridViewClassProtocol
-
The
See moreIMContextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMContextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMContextClass. Alternatively, useIMContextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMContextClassProtocol
-
GtkIMContextdefines the interface for GTK input methods.GtkIMContextis used by GTK text input widgets likeGtkTextto map from key events to Unicode character strings.An input method may consume multiple key events in sequence before finally outputting the composed result. This is called preediting, and an input method may provide feedback about this process by displaying the intermediate composition states as preedit text. To do so, the
GtkIMContextwill emit [signalGtk.IMContext::preedit-start], [signalGtk.IMContext::preedit-changed] and [signalGtk.IMContext::preedit-end] signals.For instance, the built-in GTK input method [class
Gtk.IMContextSimple] implements the input of arbitrary Unicode code points by holding down the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys and then typing <kbd>u</kbd> followed by the hexadecimal digits of the code point. When releasing the <kbd>Control</kbd> and <kbd>Shift</kbd> keys, preediting ends and the character is inserted as text. For example,Ctrl+Shift+u 2 0 A Cresults in the € sign.
Additional input methods can be made available for use by GTK widgets as loadable modules. An input method module is a small shared library which provides a
GIOExtensionfor the extension point named “gtk-im-module”.To connect a widget to the users preferred input method, you should use [class
Gtk.IMMulticontext].The
See moreIMContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMContext. Alternatively, useIMContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMContextProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkIMContextSimpleis an input method supporting table-based input methods.Compose sequences
GtkIMContextSimplereads compose sequences from the first of the following files that is found: ~/.config/gtk-4.0/Compose, ~/.XCompose, /usr/share/X11/locale/$locale/Compose (for locales that have a nontrivial Compose file). The syntax of these files is described in theCompose(5)manual page.If none of these files is found,
GtkIMContextSimpleuses a built-in table of compose sequences that is derived from the X11 Compose files.Note that compose sequences typically start with the Compose_key, which is often not available as a dedicated key on keyboards. Keyboard layouts may map this keysym to other keys, such as the right Control key.
Unicode characters
GtkIMContextSimplealso supports numeric entry of Unicode characters by typing <kbd>Ctrl</kbd>-<kbd>Shift</kbd>-<kbd>u</kbd>, followed by a hexadecimal Unicode codepoint.For example,
Ctrl-Shift-u 1 2 3 Enteryields U+0123 LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA, i.e. ģ.
Dead keys
GtkIMContextSimplesupports dead keys. For example, typingdead_acute ayields U+00E! LATIN SMALL LETTER_A WITH ACUTE, i.e. á. Note that this depends on the keyboard layout including dead keys.
The
See moreIMContextSimpleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMContextSimpleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMContextSimple. Alternatively, useIMContextSimpleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMContextSimpleProtocol : IMContextProtocol
-
GtkIMMulticontextis an input method context supporting multiple, switchable input methods.Text widgets such as
GtkTextorGtkTextViewuse aGtkIMMultiContextto implement theirim-moduleproperty for switching between different input methods.The
See moreIMMulticontextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMMulticontextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMMulticontext. Alternatively, useIMMulticontextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMMulticontextProtocol : IMContextProtocol
-
Contains information found when looking up an icon in
GtkIconTheme.GtkIconPaintableimplementsGdkPaintable.The
See moreIconPaintableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIconPaintableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIconPaintable. Alternatively, useIconPaintableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IconPaintableProtocol : ObjectProtocol, PaintableProtocol
-
GtkIconThemeprovides a facility for loading themed icons.The main reason for using a name rather than simply providing a filename is to allow different icons to be used depending on what “icon theme” is selected by the user. The operation of icon themes on Linux and Unix follows the Icon Theme Specification There is a fallback icon theme, named
hicolor, where applications should install their icons, but additional icon themes can be installed as operating system vendors and users choose.In many cases, named themes are used indirectly, via [class
Gtk.Image] rather than directly, but looking up icons directly is also simple. TheGtkIconThemeobject acts as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You can create newGtkIconThemeobjects, but it’s much more efficient to use the standard icon theme of theGtkWidgetso that the icon information is shared with other people looking up icons.GtkIconTheme *icon_theme; GtkIconPaintable *icon; GdkPaintable *paintable; icon_theme = gtk_icon_theme_get_for_display (gtk_widget_get_display (my_widget)); icon = gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon (icon_theme, "my-icon-name", // icon name 48, // icon size 1, // scale 0, // flags); paintable = GDK_PAINTABLE (icon); // Use the paintable g_object_unref (icon);The
See moreIconThemeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIconThemeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIconTheme. Alternatively, useIconThemeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IconThemeProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkIconViewis a widget which displays data in a grid of icons.GtkIconViewprovides an alternative view on aGtkTreeModel. It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like [classGtk.TreeView], it allows to select one or multiple items (depending on the selection mode, see [methodGtk.IconView.set_selection_mode]). In addition to selection with the arrow keys,GtkIconViewsupports rubberband selection, which is controlled by dragging the pointer.Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious),
GtkIconViewwill only display the first level of the tree and ignore the tree’s branches.CSS nodes
iconview.view ╰── [rubberband]GtkIconViewhas a single CSS node with name iconview and style class .view. For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.The
See moreIconViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIconViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIconView. Alternatively, useIconViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IconViewProtocol : CellLayoutProtocol, ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
The
GtkImagewidget displays an image.
Various kinds of object can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a
GdkTexturefrom a file, using the convenience function [ctorGtk.Image.new_from_file], for instance:GtkWidget *image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the image will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers.
If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with [ctor
Gdk.Texture.new_from_file], then create theGtkImagewith [ctorGtk.Image.new_from_paintable].Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of
GResourceinside GIO, for details. In this case, [propertyGtk.Image:resource], [ctorGtk.Image.new_from_resource], and [methodGtk.Image.set_from_resource] should be used.GtkImagedisplays its image as an icon, with a size that is determined by the application. See [classGtk.Picture] if you want to show an image at is actual size.CSS nodes
GtkImagehas a single CSS node with the nameimage. The style classes.normal-iconsor.large-iconsmay appear, depending on the [propertyGtk.Image:icon-size] property.Accessibility
GtkImageuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_IMGrole.The
See moreImageProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkImageinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeImage. Alternatively, useImageRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ImageProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkInfoBarcan be show messages to the user without a dialog.
It is often temporarily shown at the top or bottom of a document. In contrast to [class
Gtk.Dialog], which has an action area at the bottom,GtkInfoBarhas an action area at the side.The API of
GtkInfoBaris very similar toGtkDialog, allowing you to add buttons to the action area with [methodGtk.InfoBar.add_button] or [ctorGtk.InfoBar.new_with_buttons]. The sensitivity of action widgets can be controlled with [methodGtk.InfoBar.set_response_sensitive].To add widgets to the main content area of a
GtkInfoBar, use [methodGtk.InfoBar.add_child].Similar to [class
Gtk.MessageDialog], the contents of aGtkInfoBarcan by classified as error message, warning, informational message, etc, by using [methodGtk.InfoBar.set_message_type]. GTK may use the message type to determine how the message is displayed.A simple example for using a
GtkInfoBar:GtkWidget *message_label; GtkWidget *widget; GtkWidget *grid; GtkInfoBar *bar; // set up info bar widget = gtk_info_bar_new (); bar = GTK_INFO_BAR (widget); grid = gtk_grid_new (); message_label = gtk_label_new (""); gtk_info_bar_add_child (bar, message_label); gtk_info_bar_add_button (bar, `_("_OK")`, GTK_RESPONSE_OK); g_signal_connect (bar, "response", G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_hide), NULL); gtk_grid_attach (GTK_GRID (grid), widget, 0, 2, 1, 1); // ... // show an error message gtk_label_set_text (GTK_LABEL (message_label), "An error occurred!"); gtk_info_bar_set_message_type (bar, GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR); gtk_widget_show (bar);GtkInfoBar as GtkBuildable
GtkInfoBarsupports a custom <action-widgets> element, which can contain multiple <action-widget> elements. The “response” attribute specifies a numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget (which should be a child of the dialogsaction_area).GtkInfoBarsupports adding action widgets by specifying “action” as the “type” attribute of a<child>element. The widget will be added either to the action area. The response id has to be associated with the action widget using the<action-widgets>element.CSS nodes
GtkInfoBarhas a single CSS node with name infobar. The node may get one of the style classes .info, .warning, .error or .question, depending on the message type. If the info bar shows a close button, that button will have the .close style class applied.The
See moreInfoBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkInfoBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeInfoBar. Alternatively, useInfoBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol InfoBarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutTriggerthat triggers when a specific keyval and modifiers are pressed.The
See moreKeyvalTriggerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkKeyvalTriggerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeKeyvalTrigger. Alternatively, useKeyvalTriggerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol KeyvalTriggerProtocol : ShortcutTriggerProtocol
-
The
See moreIMContextSimpleClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMContextSimpleClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMContextSimpleClass. Alternatively, useIMContextSimpleClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMContextSimpleClassProtocol
-
The
See moreIMMulticontextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkIMMulticontextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeIMMulticontextClass. Alternatively, useIMMulticontextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol IMMulticontextClassProtocol
-
The
See moreKeyvalTriggerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkKeyvalTriggerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeKeyvalTriggerClass. Alternatively, useKeyvalTriggerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol KeyvalTriggerClassProtocol
-
The
GtkLabelwidget displays a small amount of text.As the name implies, most labels are used to label another widget such as a [class
Button].
CSS nodes
label ├── [selection] ├── [link] ┊ ╰── [link]GtkLabelhas a single CSS node with the name label. A wide variety of style classes may be applied to labels, such as .title, .subtitle, .dim-label, etc. In theGtkShortcutsWindow, labels are used with the .keycap style class.If the label has a selection, it gets a subnode with name selection.
If the label has links, there is one subnode per link. These subnodes carry the link or visited state depending on whether they have been visited. In this case, label node also gets a .link style class.
GtkLabel as GtkBuildable
The GtkLabel implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a custom <attributes> element, which supports any number of <attribute> elements. The <attribute> element has attributes named “name“, “value“, “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify [struct
Pango.Attribute] values for this label.An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
<object class="GtkLabel"> <attributes> <attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/> <attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/> </attributes> </object>The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable content instead.
Accessibility
GtkLabeluses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LABELrole.Mnemonics
Labels may contain “mnemonics”. Mnemonics are underlined characters in the label, used for keyboard navigation. Mnemonics are created by providing a string with an underscore before the mnemonic character, such as
"_File", to the functions [ctorGtk.Label.new_with_mnemonic] or [methodGtk.Label.set_text_with_mnemonic].Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is inside, such as a [class
Gtk.Button]; if the label is not inside the mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target using [classGtk.Label.set_mnemonic_widget]. Here’s a simple example where the label is inside a button:// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new (); GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello"); gtk_button_set_child (GTK_BUTTON (button), label);There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label already inside:
// Pressing Alt+H will activate this button GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");To create a mnemonic for a widget alongside the label, such as a [class
Gtk.Entry], you have to point the label at the entry with [methodGtk.Label.set_mnemonic_widget]:// Pressing Alt+H will focus the entry GtkWidget *entry = gtk_entry_new (); GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello"); gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GTK_LABEL (label), entry);Markup (styled text)
To make it easy to format text in a label (changing colors, fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple markup format:
Here’s how to create a label with a small font:
GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL); gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");(See the Pango manual for complete documentation] of available tags, [func
Pango.parse_markup])The markup passed to
gtk_label_set_markup()must be valid; for example, literal <, > and & characters must be escaped as <, >, and &. If you pass text obtained from the user, file, or a network to [methodGtk.Label.set_markup], you’ll want to escape it withg_markup_escape_text()org_markup_printf_escaped().Markup strings are just a convenient way to set the [struct
Pango.AttrList] on a label; [methodGtk.Label.set_attributes] may be a simpler way to set attributes in some cases. Be careful though; [structPango.AttrList] tends to cause internationalization problems, unless you’re applying attributes to the entire string (i.e. unless you set the range of each attribute to [0,G_MAXINT)). The reason is that specifying the start_index and end_index for a [structPango.Attribute] requires knowledge of the exact string being displayed, so translations will cause problems.Selectable labels
Labels can be made selectable with [method
Gtk.Label.set_selectable]. Selectable labels allow the user to copy the label contents to the clipboard. Only labels that contain useful-to-copy information — such as error messages — should be made selectable.Text layout
A label can contain any number of paragraphs, but will have performance problems if it contains more than a small number. Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separators understood by Pango.
Labels can automatically wrap text if you call [method
Gtk.Label.set_wrap].[method
Gtk.Label.set_justify] sets how the lines in a label align with one another. If you want to set how the label as a whole aligns in its available space, see the [propertyGtk.Widget:halign] and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties.The [property
Gtk.Label:width-chars] and [propertyGtk.Label:max-width-chars] properties can be used to control the size allocation of ellipsized or wrapped labels. For ellipsizing labels, if either is specified (and less than the actual text size), it is used as the minimum width, and the actual text size is used as the natural width of the label. For wrapping labels, width-chars is used as the minimum width, if specified, and max-width-chars is used as the natural width. Even if max-width-chars specified, wrapping labels will be rewrapped to use all of the available width.Links
GTK supports markup for clickable hyperlinks in addition to regular Pango markup. The markup for links is borrowed from HTML, using the
<a>with “href“, “title“ and “class“ attributes. GTK renders links similar to the way they appear in web browsers, with colored, underlined text. The “title“ attribute is displayed as a tooltip on the link. The “class“ attribute is used as style class on the CSS node for the link.An example looks like this:
const char *text = "Go to the" "<a href=\"http://www.gtk.org title=\"<i>Our</i> website\">" "GTK website</a> for more..."; GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL); gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), text);It is possible to implement custom handling for links and their tooltips with the [signal
Gtk.Label::activate-link] signal and the [methodGtk.Label.get_current_uri] function.The
See moreLabelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLabelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLabel. Alternatively, useLabelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LabelProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkLayoutChildis the base class for objects that are meant to hold layout properties.If a
GtkLayoutManagerhas per-child properties, like their packing type, or the horizontal and vertical span, or the icon name, then the layout manager should use aGtkLayoutChildimplementation to store those properties.A
GtkLayoutChildinstance is only ever valid while a widget is part of a layout.The
See moreLayoutChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLayoutChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLayoutChild. Alternatively, useLayoutChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LayoutChildProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
Layout managers are delegate classes that handle the preferred size and the allocation of a widget.
You typically subclass
GtkLayoutManagerif you want to implement a layout policy for the children of a widget, or if you want to determine the size of a widget depending on its contents.Each
GtkWidgetcan only have aGtkLayoutManagerinstance associated to it at any given time; it is possible, though, to replace the layout manager instance using [methodGtk.Widget.set_layout_manager].Layout properties
A layout manager can expose properties for controlling the layout of each child, by creating an object type derived from [class
Gtk.LayoutChild] and installing the properties on it as normalGObjectproperties.Each
GtkLayoutChildinstance storing the layout properties for a specific child is created through the [methodGtk.LayoutManager.get_layout_child] method; aGtkLayoutManagercontrols the creation of itsGtkLayoutChildinstances by overriding theGtkLayoutManagerClass.create_layout_child()virtual function. The typical implementation should look like:static GtkLayoutChild * create_layout_child (GtkLayoutManager *manager, GtkWidget *container, GtkWidget *child) { return g_object_new (your_layout_child_get_type (), "layout-manager", manager, "child-widget", child, NULL); }The [property
Gtk.LayoutChild:layout-manager] and [propertyGtk.LayoutChild:child-widget] properties on the newly createdGtkLayoutChildinstance are mandatory. TheGtkLayoutManagerwill cache the newly createdGtkLayoutChildinstance until the widget is removed from its parent, or the parent removes the layout manager.Each
GtkLayoutManagerinstance creating aGtkLayoutChildshould use [methodGtk.LayoutManager.get_layout_child] every time it needs to query the layout properties; eachGtkLayoutChildinstance should call [methodGtk.LayoutManager.layout_changed] every time a property is updated, in order to queue a new size measuring and allocation.The
See moreLayoutManagerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLayoutManagerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLayoutManager. Alternatively, useLayoutManagerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LayoutManagerProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkLevelBaris a widget that can be used as a level indicator.Typical use cases are displaying the strength of a password, or showing the charge level of a battery.

Use [method
Gtk.LevelBar.set_value] to set the current value, and [methodGtk.LevelBar.add_offset_value] to set the value offsets at which the bar will be considered in a different state. GTK will add a few offsets by default on the level bar:GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGHandGTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL, with values 0.25, 0.75 and 1.0 respectively.Note that it is your responsibility to update preexisting offsets when changing the minimum or maximum value. GTK will simply clamp them to the new range.
Adding a custom offset on the bar
static GtkWidget * create_level_bar (void) { GtkWidget *widget; GtkLevelBar *bar; widget = gtk_level_bar_new (); bar = GTK_LEVEL_BAR (widget); // This changes the value of the default low offset gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW, 0.10); // This adds a new offset to the bar; the application will // be able to change its color CSS like this: // // levelbar block.my-offset { // background-color: magenta; // border-style: solid; // border-color: black; // border-style: 1px; // } gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, "my-offset", 0.60); return widget; }The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to modify the interval using [method
Gtk.LevelBar.set_min_value] and [methodGtk.LevelBar.set_max_value]. The value will be always drawn in proportion to the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between 10 and 20 is equivalent to a value of 0.5 with an interval between 0 and 1. WhenGTK_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_DISCRETEis used, the bar level is rendered as a finite number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by the admissible interval.For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator mode to discrete.
GtkLevelBar as GtkBuildable
The
GtkLevelBarimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports a custom <offsets> element, which can contain any number of <offset> elements, each of which must have name and value attributes.CSS nodes
levelbar[.discrete] ╰── trough ├── block.filled.level-name ┊ ├── block.empty ┊GtkLevelBarhas a main CSS node with name levelbar and one of the style classes .discrete or .continuous and a subnode with name trough. Below the trough node are a number of nodes with name block and style class .filled or .empty. In continuous mode, there is exactly one node of each, in discrete mode, the number of filled and unfilled nodes corresponds to blocks that are drawn. The block.filled nodes also get a style class .level-name corresponding to the level for the current value.In horizontal orientation, the nodes are always arranged from left to right, regardless of text direction.
Accessibility
GtkLevelBaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_METERrole.The
See moreLevelBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLevelBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLevelBar. Alternatively, useLevelBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LevelBarProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkLinkButtonis a button with a hyperlink.
It is useful to show quick links to resources.
A link button is created by calling either [ctor
Gtk.LinkButton.new] or [ctorGtk.LinkButton.new_with_label]. If using the former, the URI you pass to the constructor is used as a label for the widget.The URI bound to a
GtkLinkButtoncan be set specifically using [methodGtk.LinkButton.set_uri].By default,
GtkLinkButtoncalls [funcGtk.show_uri] when the button is clicked. This behaviour can be overridden by connecting to the [signalGtk.LinkButton::activate-link] signal and returningtruefrom the signal handler.CSS nodes
GtkLinkButtonhas a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plainGtkButton, it gets the .link style class.Accessibility
GtkLinkButtonuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LINKrole.The
See moreLinkButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLinkButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLinkButton. Alternatively, useLinkButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LinkButtonProtocol : ButtonProtocol
-
GtkListBaseis the abstract base class for GTK’s list widgets.The
See moreListBaseProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListBaseinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListBase. Alternatively, useListBaseRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListBaseProtocol : OrientableProtocol, ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkListBoxis a vertical list.A
GtkListBoxonly containsGtkListBoxRowchildren. These rows can by dynamically sorted and filtered, and headers can be added dynamically depending on the row content. It also allows keyboard and mouse navigation and selection like a typical list.Using
GtkListBoxis often an alternative toGtkTreeView, especially when the list contents has a more complicated layout than what is allowed by aGtkCellRenderer, or when the contents is interactive (i.e. has a button in it).Although a
GtkListBoxmust have onlyGtkListBoxRowchildren, you can add any kind of widget to it via [methodGtk.ListBox.prepend], [methodGtk.ListBox.append] and [methodGtk.ListBox.insert] and aGtkListBoxRowwidget will automatically be inserted between the list and the widget.GtkListBoxRowscan be marked as activatable or selectable. If a row is activatable, [signalGtk.ListBox::row-activated] will be emitted for it when the user tries to activate it. If it is selectable, the row will be marked as selected when the user tries to select it.GtkListBox as GtkBuildable
The
GtkListBoximplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports setting a child as the placeholder by specifying “placeholder” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. See [methodGtk.ListBox.set_placeholder] for info.CSS nodes
(plain Language Example):
list[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar] ╰── row[.activatable]GtkListBoxuses a single CSS node named list. It may carry the .separators style class, when the [propertyGtk.ListBox:show-separators] property is set. EachGtkListBoxRowuses a single CSS node named row. The row nodes get the .activatable style class added when appropriate.The main list node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
GtkListBoxuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LISTrole andGtkListBoxRowuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST_ITEMrole.The
See moreListBoxProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListBoxinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListBox. Alternatively, useListBoxRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListBoxProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkListBoxRowis the kind of widget that can be added to aGtkListBox.The
See moreListBoxRowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListBoxRowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListBoxRow. Alternatively, useListBoxRowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListBoxRowProtocol : ActionableProtocol
-
GtkListItemis used by list widgets to represent items in aGListModel.The
GtkListItems are managed by the list widget (with its factory) and cannot be created by applications, but they need to be populated by application code. This is done by calling [methodGtk.ListItem.set_child].GtkListItems exist in 2 stages:The unbound stage where the listitem is not currently connected to an item in the list. In that case, the [property
Gtk.ListItem:item] property is set tonil.The bound stage where the listitem references an item from the list. The [property
Gtk.ListItem:item] property is notnil.
The
See moreListItemProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListIteminstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListItem. Alternatively, useListItemRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListItemProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkListItemFactorycreates widgets for the items taken from aGListModel.This is one of the core concepts of handling list widgets such as [class
Gtk.ListView] or [classGtk.GridView].The
GtkListItemFactoryis tasked with creating widgets for items taken from the model when the views need them and updating them as the items displayed by the view change.A view is usually only able to display anything after both a factory and a model have been set on the view. So it is important that you do not skip this step when setting up your first view.
Because views do not display the whole list at once but only a few items, they only need to maintain a few widgets at a time. They will instruct the
GtkListItemFactoryto create these widgets and bind them to the items that are currently displayed.As the list model changes or the user scrolls to the list, the items will change and the view will instruct the factory to bind the widgets to those new items.
The actual widgets used for displaying those widgets is provided by you.
When the factory needs widgets created, it will create a
GtkListItemand hand it to your code to set up a widget for. This list item will provide various properties with information about what item to display and provide you with some opportunities to configure its behavior. See the [classGtk.ListItem] documentation for further details.Various implementations of
GtkListItemFactoryexist to allow you different ways to provide those widgets. The most common implementations are [classGtk.BuilderListItemFactory] which takes aGtkBuilder.ui file and then creates widgets and manages everything automatically from the information in that file and [classGtk.SignalListItemFactory] which allows you to connect to signals with your own code and retain full control over how the widgets are setup and managed.A
GtkListItemFactoryis supposed to be final - that means its behavior should not change and the first widget created from it should behave the same way as the last widget created from it. If you intend to do changes to the behavior, it is recommended that you create a newGtkListItemFactorywhich will allow the views to recreate its widgets.Once you have chosen your factory and created it, you need to set it on the view widget you want to use it with, such as via [method
Gtk.ListView.set_factory]. Reusing factories across different views is allowed, but very uncommon.The
See moreListItemFactoryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListItemFactoryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListItemFactory. Alternatively, useListItemFactoryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListItemFactoryProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A list-like data structure that can be used with the GtkTreeView
The
GtkListStoreobject is a list model for use with aGtkTreeViewwidget. It implements theGtkTreeModelinterface, and consequentialy, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements theGtkTreeSortableinterface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree drag and drop interfaces.The
GtkListStorecan accept most GObject types as a column type, though it can’t accept all custom types. Internally, it will keep a copy of data passed in (such as a string or a boxed pointer). Columns that acceptGObjects are handled a little differently. TheGtkListStorewill keep a reference to the object instead of copying the value. As a result, if the object is modified, it is up to the application writer to callgtk_tree_model_row_changed()to emit theGtkTreeModelrow_changedsignal. This most commonly affects lists withGdkTextures stored.An example for creating a simple list store: (C Language Example):
enum { COLUMN_STRING, COLUMN_INT, COLUMN_BOOLEAN, N_COLUMNS }; { GtkListStore *list_store; GtkTreePath *path; GtkTreeIter iter; int i; list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS, G_TYPE_STRING, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_BOOLEAN); for (i = 0; i < 10; i++) { char *some_data; some_data = get_some_data (i); // Add a new row to the model gtk_list_store_append (list_store, &iter); gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter, COLUMN_STRING, some_data, COLUMN_INT, i, COLUMN_BOOLEAN, FALSE, -1); // As the store will keep a copy of the string internally, // we free some_data. g_free (some_data); } // Modify a particular row path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("4"); gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL (list_store), &iter, path); gtk_tree_path_free (path); gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter, COLUMN_BOOLEAN, TRUE, -1); }Performance Considerations
Internally, the
GtkListStorewas originally implemented with a linked list with a tail pointer. As a result, it was fast at data insertion and deletion, and not fast at random data access. TheGtkListStoresets theGTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSISTflag, which means thatGtkTreeIters can be cached while the row exists. Thus, if access to a particular row is needed often and your code is expected to run on older versions of GTK, it is worth keeping the iter around.Atomic Operations
It is important to note that only the methods
gtk_list_store_insert_with_values()andgtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv()are atomic, in the sense that the row is being appended to the store and the values filled in in a single operation with regard toGtkTreeModelsignaling. In contrast, using e.g.gtk_list_store_append()and thengtk_list_store_set()will first create a row, which triggers theGtkTreeModelrow-insertedsignal onGtkListStore. The row, however, is still empty, and any signal handler connecting toGtkTreeModelrow-insertedon this particular store should be prepared for the situation that the row might be empty. This is especially important if you are wrapping theGtkListStoreinside aGtkTreeModelFilter and are using aGtkTreeModelFilterVisibleFunc. Using any of the non-atomic operations to append rows to theGtkListStorewill cause theGtkTreeModelFilterVisibleFunc to be visited with an empty row first; the function must be prepared for that.GtkListStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkListStore implementation of the GtkBuildable interface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.
Additionally, it is possible to specify content for the list store in the UI definition, with the <data> element. It can contain multiple <row> elements, each specifying to content for one row of the list model. Inside a <row>, the <col> elements specify the content for individual cells.
Note that it is probably more common to define your models in the code, and one might consider it a layering violation to specify the content of a list store in a UI definition, data, not presentation, and common wisdom is to separate the two, as far as possible.
An example of a UI Definition fragment for a list store: (C Language Example):
<object class="GtkListStore"> <columns> <column type="gchararray"/> <column type="gchararray"/> <column type="gint"/> </columns> <data> <row> <col id="0">John</col> <col id="1">Doe</col> <col id="2">25</col> </row> <row> <col id="0">Johan</col> <col id="1">Dahlin</col> <col id="2">50</col> </row> </data> </object>The
See moreListStoreProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListStoreinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListStore. Alternatively, useListStoreRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListStoreProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol, TreeDragDestProtocol, TreeDragSourceProtocol, TreeSortableProtocol
-
GtkListViewpresents a large dynamic list of items.GtkListViewuses its factory to generate one row widget for each visible item and shows them in a linear display, either vertically or horizontally.The [property
Gtk.ListView:show-separators] property offers a simple way to display separators between the rows.GtkListViewallows the user to select items according to the selection characteristics of the model. For models that allow multiple selected items, it is possible to turn on rubberband selection, using [propertyGtk.ListView:enable-rubberband].If you need multiple columns with headers, see [class
Gtk.ColumnView].To learn more about the list widget framework, see the overview.
An example of using
GtkListView:static void setup_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory, GtkListItem *list_item) { GtkWidget *image; image = gtk_image_new (); gtk_image_set_icon_size (GTK_IMAGE (image), GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE); gtk_list_item_set_child (list_item, image); } static void bind_listitem_cb (GtkListItemFactory *factory, GtkListItem *list_item) { GtkWidget *image; GAppInfo *app_info; image = gtk_list_item_get_child (list_item); app_info = gtk_list_item_get_item (list_item); gtk_image_set_from_gicon (GTK_IMAGE (image), g_app_info_get_icon (app_info)); } static void activate_cb (GtkListView *list, guint position, gpointer unused) { GAppInfo *app_info; app_info = g_list_model_get_item (G_LIST_MODEL (gtk_list_view_get_model (list)), position); g_app_info_launch (app_info, NULL, NULL, NULL); g_object_unref (app_info); } ... model = create_application_list (); factory = gtk_signal_list_item_factory_new (); g_signal_connect (factory, "setup", G_CALLBACK (setup_listitem_cb), NULL); g_signal_connect (factory, "bind", G_CALLBACK (bind_listitem_cb), NULL); list = gtk_list_view_new (GTK_SELECTION_MODEL (gtk_single_selection_new (model)), factory); g_signal_connect (list, "activate", G_CALLBACK (activate_cb), NULL); gtk_scrolled_window_set_child (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (sw), list);CSS nodes
listview[.separators][.rich-list][.navigation-sidebar][.data-table] ├── row[.activatable] │ ├── row[.activatable] │ ┊ ╰── [rubberband]GtkListViewuses a single CSS node namedlistview. It may carry the.separatorsstyle class, when [propertyGtk.ListView:show-separators] property is set. Each child widget uses a single CSS node namedrow. If the [propertyGtk.ListItem:activatable] property is set, the corresponding row will have the.activatablestyle class. For rubberband selection, a node with namerubberbandis used.The main listview node may also carry style classes to select the style of list presentation: .rich-list, .navigation-sidebar or .data-table.
Accessibility
GtkListViewuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LISTrole, and the list items use theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_LIST_ITEMrole.The
See moreListViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListView. Alternatively, useListViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListViewProtocol : ListBaseProtocol
-
GtkLockButtonis a widget to obtain and revoke authorizations needed to operate the controls.
It is typically used in preference dialogs or control panels.
The required authorization is represented by a
GPermissionobject. Concrete implementations ofGPermissionmay use PolicyKit or some other authorization framework. To obtain a PolicyKit-basedGPermission, usepolkit_permission_new().If the user is not currently allowed to perform the action, but can obtain the permission, the widget looks like this:

and the user can click the button to request the permission. Depending on the platform, this may pop up an authentication dialog or ask the user to authenticate in some other way. Once the user has obtained the permission, the widget changes to this:

and the permission can be dropped again by clicking the button. If the user is not able to obtain the permission at all, the widget looks like this:

If the user has the permission and cannot drop it, the button is hidden.
The text (and tooltips) that are shown in the various cases can be adjusted with the [property
Gtk.LockButton:text-lock], [propertyGtk.LockButton:text-unlock], [propertyGtk.LockButton:tooltip-lock], [propertyGtk.LockButton:tooltip-unlock] and [propertyGtk.LockButton:tooltip-not-authorized] properties.The
See moreLockButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLockButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLockButton. Alternatively, useLockButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LockButtonProtocol : ButtonProtocol
-
A
GtkMapListModelmaps the items in a list model to different items.GtkMapListModeluses a [callbackGtk.MapListModelMapFunc].Example: Create a list of
GtkEventControllersstatic gpointer map_to_controllers (gpointer widget, gpointer data) { gpointer result = gtk_widget_observe_controllers (widget); g_object_unref (widget); return result; } widgets = gtk_widget_observe_children (widget); controllers = gtk_map_list_model_new (G_TYPE_LIST_MODEL, widgets, map_to_controllers, NULL, NULL); model = gtk_flatten_list_model_new (GTK_TYPE_EVENT_CONTROLLER, controllers);GtkMapListModelwill attempt to discard the mapped objects as soon as they are no longer needed and recreate them if necessary.The
See moreMapListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMapListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMapListModel. Alternatively, useMapListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MapListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
The
See moreLayoutChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLayoutChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLayoutChildClass. Alternatively, useLayoutChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LayoutChildClassProtocol
-
The
GtkLayoutManagerClassstructure contains only private data, and should only be accessed through the provided API, or when subclassingGtkLayoutManager.The
See moreLayoutManagerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkLayoutManagerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeLayoutManagerClass. Alternatively, useLayoutManagerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol LayoutManagerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListBaseClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListBaseClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListBaseClass. Alternatively, useListBaseClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListBaseClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListBoxRowClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListBoxRowClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListBoxRowClass. Alternatively, useListBoxRowClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListBoxRowClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListItemClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListItemClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListItemClass. Alternatively, useListItemClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListItemClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListItemFactoryClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListItemFactoryClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListItemFactoryClass. Alternatively, useListItemFactoryClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListItemFactoryClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListStoreClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListStoreClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListStoreClass. Alternatively, useListStoreClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListStoreClassProtocol
-
The
See moreListViewClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkListViewClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeListViewClass. Alternatively, useListViewClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ListViewClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMapListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMapListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMapListModelClass. Alternatively, useMapListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MapListModelClassProtocol
-
GtkMediaControlsis a widget to show controls for a video.
Usually,
GtkMediaControlsis used as part of [classGtk.Video].The
See moreMediaControlsProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaControlsinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaControls. Alternatively, useMediaControlsRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaControlsProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkMediaFileimplementsGtkMediaStreamfor files.This provides a simple way to play back video files with GTK.
GTK provides a GIO extension point for
GtkMediaFileimplementations to allow for external implementations using various media frameworks.GTK itself includes implementations using GStreamer and ffmpeg.
The
See moreMediaFileProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaFileinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaFile. Alternatively, useMediaFileRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaFileProtocol : MediaStreamProtocol
-
GtkMediaStreamis the integration point for media playback inside GTK.GTK provides an implementation of the
GtkMediaStreaminterface that is called [classGtk.MediaFile].Apart from application-facing API for stream playback,
GtkMediaStreamhas a number of APIs that are only useful for implementations and should not be used in applications: [methodGtk.MediaStream.prepared], [methodGtk.MediaStream.unprepared], [methodGtk.MediaStream.update], [methodGtk.MediaStream.ended], [methodGtk.MediaStream.seek_success], [methodGtk.MediaStream.seek_failed], [methodGtk.MediaStream.gerror], [methodGtk.MediaStream.error], [methodGtk.MediaStream.error_valist].The
See moreMediaStreamProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaStreaminstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaStream. Alternatively, useMediaStreamRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaStreamProtocol : ObjectProtocol, PaintableProtocol
-
The
GtkMenuButtonwidget is used to display a popup when clicked.
This popup can be provided either as a
GtkPopoveror as an abstractGMenuModel.The
GtkMenuButtonwidget can show either an icon (set with the [propertyGtk.MenuButton:icon-name] property) or a label (set with the [propertyGtk.MenuButton:label] property). If neither is explicitly set, a [classGtk.Image] is automatically created, using an arrow image oriented according to [propertyGtk.MenuButton:direction] or the generic “open-menu-symbolic” icon if the direction is not set.The positioning of the popup is determined by the [property
Gtk.MenuButton:direction] property of the menu button.For menus, the [property
Gtk.Widget:halign] and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties of the menu are also taken into account. For example, when the direction isGTK_ARROW_DOWNand the horizontal alignment isGTK_ALIGN_START, the menu will be positioned below the button, with the starting edge (depending on the text direction) of the menu aligned with the starting edge of the button. If there is not enough space below the button, the menu is popped up above the button instead. If the alignment would move part of the menu offscreen, it is “pushed in”.start center end down 


up 


left 


right 


CSS nodes
menubutton ╰── button.toggle ╰── <content> ╰── [arrow]GtkMenuButtonhas a single CSS node with namemenubuttonwhich contains abuttonnode with a.togglestyle class.If the button contains only an icon or an arrow, it will have the
.image-buttonstyle class, if it contains both, it will have the.arrow-buttonstyle class.Inside the toggle button content, there is an
arrownode for the indicator, which will carry one of the.none,.up,.down,.leftor.rightstyle classes to indicate the direction that the menu will appear in. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image for each of these cases using the-gtk-icon-sourceproperty.Optionally, the
menubuttonnode can carry the.circularstyle class to request a round appearance.Accessibility
GtkMenuButtonuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTONrole.The
See moreMenuButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMenuButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMenuButton. Alternatively, useMenuButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MenuButtonProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkMessageDialogpresents a dialog with some message text.
It’s simply a convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of
GtkMessageDialogfromGtkDialogwithout too much effort, butGtkMessageDialogsaves typing.The easiest way to do a modal message dialog is to use the
GTK_DIALOG_MODALflag, which will call [methodGtk.Window.set_modal] internally. The dialog will prevent interaction with the parent window until it’s hidden or destroyed. You can use the [signalGtk.Dialog::response] signal to know when the user dismissed the dialog.An example for using a modal dialog:
GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT | GTK_DIALOG_MODAL; dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window, flags, GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR, GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE, "Error reading “`s`”: `s`", filename, g_strerror (errno)); // Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it // (e.g. clicks a button) g_signal_connect (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy), NULL);You might do a non-modal
GtkMessageDialogsimply by omitting theGTK_DIALOG_MODALflag:GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT; dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window, flags, GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR, GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE, "Error reading “`s`”: `s`", filename, g_strerror (errno)); // Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it // (e.g. clicks a button) g_signal_connect (dialog, "response", G_CALLBACK (gtk_window_destroy), NULL);GtkMessageDialog as GtkBuildable
The
GtkMessageDialogimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface exposes the message area as an internal child with the name “message_area”.The
See moreMessageDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMessageDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMessageDialog. Alternatively, useMessageDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MessageDialogProtocol : DialogProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutActionthat callsgtk_widget_mnemonic_activate().The
See moreMnemonicActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMnemonicActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMnemonicAction. Alternatively, useMnemonicActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MnemonicActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutTriggerthat triggers when a specific mnemonic is pressed.Mnemonics require a mnemonic modifier (typically <kbd>Alt</kbd>) to be pressed together with the mnemonic key.
The
See moreMnemonicTriggerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMnemonicTriggerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMnemonicTrigger. Alternatively, useMnemonicTriggerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MnemonicTriggerProtocol : ShortcutTriggerProtocol
-
GtkMountOperationis an implementation ofGMountOperation.The functions and objects described here make working with GTK and GIO more convenient.
GtkMountOperationis needed when mounting volumes: It is an implementation ofGMountOperationthat can be used with GIO functions for mounting volumes such asg_file_mount_enclosing_volume(),g_file_mount_mountable(),g_volume_mount(),g_mount_unmount_with_operation()and others.When necessary,
GtkMountOperationshows dialogs to let the user enter passwords, ask questions or show processes blocking unmount.The
See moreMountOperationProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMountOperationinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMountOperation. Alternatively, useMountOperationRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MountOperationProtocol : MountOperationProtocol
-
GtkMultiFilteris the base class for filters that combine multiple filters.The
See moreMultiFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiFilter. Alternatively, useMultiFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiFilterProtocol : ListModelProtocol, BuildableProtocol, FilterProtocol
-
GtkMultiSelectionis aGtkSelectionModelthat allows selecting multiple elements.The
See moreMultiSelectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiSelectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiSelection. Alternatively, useMultiSelectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiSelectionProtocol : ObjectProtocol, SelectionModelProtocol
-
GtkMultiSortercombines multiple sorters by trying them in turn.If the first sorter compares two items as equal, the second is tried next, and so on.
The
See moreMultiSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiSorter. Alternatively, useMultiSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiSorterProtocol : ListModelProtocol, BuildableProtocol, SorterProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutActionthat activates an action by name.The
See moreNamedActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNamedActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNamedAction. Alternatively, useNamedActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NamedActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
The
See moreMediaControlsClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaControlsClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaControlsClass. Alternatively, useMediaControlsClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaControlsClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMediaFileClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaFileClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaFileClass. Alternatively, useMediaFileClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaFileClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMediaStreamClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMediaStreamClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMediaStreamClass. Alternatively, useMediaStreamClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MediaStreamClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMessageDialogClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMessageDialogClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMessageDialogClass. Alternatively, useMessageDialogClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MessageDialogClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMnemonicActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMnemonicActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMnemonicActionClass. Alternatively, useMnemonicActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MnemonicActionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMnemonicTriggerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMnemonicTriggerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMnemonicTriggerClass. Alternatively, useMnemonicTriggerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MnemonicTriggerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMountOperationClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMountOperationClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMountOperationClass. Alternatively, useMountOperationClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MountOperationClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMultiFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiFilterClass. Alternatively, useMultiFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiFilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMultiSelectionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiSelectionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiSelectionClass. Alternatively, useMultiSelectionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiSelectionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreMultiSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkMultiSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeMultiSorterClass. Alternatively, useMultiSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol MultiSorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreNamedActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNamedActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNamedActionClass. Alternatively, useNamedActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NamedActionClassProtocol
-
Native dialogs are platform dialogs that don’t use
GtkDialog.They are used in order to integrate better with a platform, by looking the same as other native applications and supporting platform specific features.
The [class
Gtk.Dialog] functions cannot be used on such objects, but we need a similar API in order to drive them. TheGtkNativeDialogobject is an API that allows you to do this. It allows you to set various common properties on the dialog, as well as show and hide it and get a [signalGtk.NativeDialog::response] signal when the user finished with the dialog.Note that unlike
GtkDialog,GtkNativeDialogobjects are not toplevel widgets, and GTK does not keep them alive. It is your responsibility to keep a reference until you are done with the object.The
See moreNativeDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNativeDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNativeDialog. Alternatively, useNativeDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NativeDialogProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutTriggerthat never triggers.The
See moreNeverTriggerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNeverTriggerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNeverTrigger. Alternatively, useNeverTriggerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NeverTriggerProtocol : ShortcutTriggerProtocol
-
GtkNoSelectionis aGtkSelectionModelthat does not allow selecting anything.This model is meant to be used as a simple wrapper around a
GListModelwhen aGtkSelectionModelis required.The
See moreNoSelectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNoSelectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNoSelection. Alternatively, useNoSelectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NoSelectionProtocol : ObjectProtocol, SelectionModelProtocol
-
GtkNotebookis a container whose children are pages switched between using tabs.
There are many configuration options for
GtkNotebook. Among other things, you can choose on which edge the tabs appear (see [methodGtk.Notebook.set_tab_pos]), whether, if there are too many tabs to fit the notebook should be made bigger or scrolling arrows added (see [methodGtk.Notebook.set_scrollable]), and whether there will be a popup menu allowing the users to switch pages. (see [methodGtk.Notebook.popup_enable]).GtkNotebook as GtkBuildable
The
GtkNotebookimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports placing children into tabs by specifying “tab” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element. Note that the content of the tab must be created before the tab can be filled. A tab child can be specified without specifying a <child> type attribute.To add a child widget in the notebooks action area, specify “action-start” or “action-end” as the “type” attribute of the <child> element.
An example of a UI definition fragment with
GtkNotebook:<object class="GtkNotebook"> <child> <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-content"> <property name="label">Content</property> </object> </child> <child type="tab"> <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-tab"> <property name="label">Tab</property> </object> </child> </object>CSS nodes
notebook ├── header.top │ ├── [<action widget>] │ ├── tabs │ │ ├── [arrow] │ │ ├── tab │ │ │ ╰── <tab label> ┊ ┊ ┊ │ │ ├── tab[.reorderable-page] │ │ │ ╰── <tab label> │ │ ╰── [arrow] │ ╰── [<action widget>] │ ╰── stack ├── <child> ┊ ╰── <child>GtkNotebookhas a main CSS node with namenotebook, a subnode with nameheaderand below that a subnode with nametabswhich contains one subnode per tab with nametab.If action widgets are present, their CSS nodes are placed next to the
tabsnode. If the notebook is scrollable, CSS nodes with namearroware placed as first and last child of thetabsnode.The main node gets the
.framestyle class when the notebook has a border (see [methodGtk.Notebook.set_show_border]).The header node gets one of the style class
.top,.bottom,.leftor.right, depending on where the tabs are placed. For reorderable pages, the tab node gets the.reorderable-pageclass.A
tabnode gets the.dndstyle class while it is moved with drag-and-drop.The nodes are always arranged from left-to-right, regardless of text direction.
Accessibility
GtkNotebookuses the following roles:GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUPfor the notebook widgetGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_LISTfor the list of tabsGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TABrole for each tabGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_PANELfor each page
The
See moreNotebookProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNotebookinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNotebook. Alternatively, useNotebookRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NotebookProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkNotebookPageis an auxiliary object used byGtkNotebook.The
See moreNotebookPageProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNotebookPageinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNotebookPage. Alternatively, useNotebookPageRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NotebookPageProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutActionthat does nothing.The
See moreNothingActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNothingActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNothingAction. Alternatively, useNothingActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NothingActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
GtkNumericSorteris aGtkSorterthat compares numbers.To obtain the numbers to compare, this sorter evaluates a [class
Gtk.Expression].The
See moreNumericSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNumericSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNumericSorter. Alternatively, useNumericSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NumericSorterProtocol : SorterProtocol
-
A
GObjectvalue in aGtkExpression.The
See moreObjectExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkObjectExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeObjectExpression. Alternatively, useObjectExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ObjectExpressionProtocol : ExpressionProtocol
-
Class structure for
GtkNativeDialog.The
See moreNativeDialogClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNativeDialogClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNativeDialogClass. Alternatively, useNativeDialogClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NativeDialogClassProtocol
-
The
See moreNativeInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNativeInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNativeInterface. Alternatively, useNativeInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NativeInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreNeverTriggerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNeverTriggerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNeverTriggerClass. Alternatively, useNeverTriggerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NeverTriggerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreNoSelectionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNoSelectionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNoSelectionClass. Alternatively, useNoSelectionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NoSelectionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreNothingActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNothingActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNothingActionClass. Alternatively, useNothingActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NothingActionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreNumericSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkNumericSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeNumericSorterClass. Alternatively, useNumericSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol NumericSorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreOrientableIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOrientableIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOrientableIface. Alternatively, useOrientableIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OrientableIfaceProtocol
-
The
GtkOrientableinterface is implemented by all widgets that can be oriented horizontally or vertically.GtkOrientableis more flexible in that it allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to “flip”.The
See moreOrientableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOrientableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOrientable. Alternatively, useOrientableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OrientableProtocol
-
GtkPrintOperationPreviewis the interface that is used to implement print preview.A
GtkPrintOperationPreviewobject is passed to the [signalGtk.PrintOperation::preview] signal by [classGtk.PrintOperation].The
See morePrintOperationPreviewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintOperationPreviewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintOperationPreview. Alternatively, usePrintOperationPreviewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintOperationPreviewProtocol
-
GtkOverlayis a container which contains a single main child, on top of which it can place “overlay” widgets.
The position of each overlay widget is determined by its [property
Gtk.Widget:halign] and [propertyGtk.Widget:valign] properties. E.g. a widget with both alignments set toGTK_ALIGN_STARTwill be placed at the top left corner of theGtkOverlaycontainer, whereas an overlay with halign set toGTK_ALIGN_CENTERand valign set toGTK_ALIGN_ENDwill be placed a the bottom edge of theGtkOverlay, horizontally centered. The position can be adjusted by setting the margin properties of the child to non-zero values.More complicated placement of overlays is possible by connecting to the [signal
Gtk.Overlay::get-child-position] signal.An overlay’s minimum and natural sizes are those of its main child. The sizes of overlay children are not considered when measuring these preferred sizes.
GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable
The
GtkOverlayimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports placing a child as an overlay by specifying “overlay” as the “type” attribute of a<child>element.CSS nodes
GtkOverlayhas a single CSS node with the name “overlay”. Overlay children whose alignments cause them to be positioned at an edge get the style classes “.left”, “.right”, “.top”, and/or “.bottom” according to their position.The
See moreOverlayProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOverlayinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOverlay. Alternatively, useOverlayRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OverlayProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkOverlayLayoutis the layout manager used byGtkOverlay.It places widgets as overlays on top of the main child.
This is not a reusable layout manager, since it expects its widget to be a
GtkOverlay. It only listed here so that its layout properties get documented.The
See moreOverlayLayoutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOverlayLayoutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOverlayLayout. Alternatively, useOverlayLayoutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OverlayLayoutProtocol : LayoutManagerProtocol
-
GtkLayoutChildsubclass for children in aGtkOverlayLayout.The
See moreOverlayLayoutChildProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOverlayLayoutChildinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOverlayLayoutChild. Alternatively, useOverlayLayoutChildRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OverlayLayoutChildProtocol : LayoutChildProtocol
-
GtkPadControlleris an event controller for the pads found in drawing tablets.Pads are the collection of buttons and tactile sensors often found around the stylus-sensitive area.
These buttons and sensors have no implicit meaning, and by default they perform no action.
GtkPadControlleris provided to map those toGActionobjects, thus letting the application give them a more semantic meaning.Buttons and sensors are not constrained to triggering a single action, some
GDK_SOURCE_TABLET_PADdevices feature multiple “modes”. All these input elements have one current mode, which may determine the final action being triggered.Pad devices often divide buttons and sensors into groups. All elements in a group share the same current mode, but different groups may have different modes. See [method
Gdk.DevicePad.get_n_groups] and [methodGdk.DevicePad.get_group_n_modes].Each of the actions that a given button/strip/ring performs for a given mode is defined by a [struct
Gtk.PadActionEntry]. It contains an action name that will be looked up in the givenGActionGroupand activated whenever the specified input element and mode are triggered.A simple example of
GtkPadControllerusage: Assigning button 1 in all modes and pad devices to an “invert-selection” action:GtkPadActionEntry *pad_actions[] = { { GTK_PAD_ACTION_BUTTON, 1, -1, "Invert selection", "pad-actions.invert-selection" }, … }; … action_group = g_simple_action_group_new (); action = g_simple_action_new ("pad-actions.invert-selection", NULL); g_signal_connect (action, "activate", on_invert_selection_activated, NULL); g_action_map_add_action (G_ACTION_MAP (action_group), action); … pad_controller = gtk_pad_controller_new (action_group, NULL);The actions belonging to rings/strips will be activated with a parameter of type
G_VARIANT_TYPE_DOUBLEbearing the value of the given axis, it is required that those are made stateful and accepting thisGVariantType.The
See morePadControllerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPadControllerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePadController. Alternatively, usePadControllerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PadControllerProtocol : EventControllerProtocol
-
The
See moreOverlayLayoutChildClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOverlayLayoutChildClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOverlayLayoutChildClass. Alternatively, useOverlayLayoutChildClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OverlayLayoutChildClassProtocol
-
The
See moreOverlayLayoutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkOverlayLayoutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeOverlayLayoutClass. Alternatively, useOverlayLayoutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol OverlayLayoutClassProtocol
-
Struct defining a pad action entry.
The
See morePadActionEntryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPadActionEntryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePadActionEntry. Alternatively, usePadActionEntryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PadActionEntryProtocol
-
The
See morePadControllerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPadControllerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePadControllerClass. Alternatively, usePadControllerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PadControllerClassProtocol
-
A range of pages to print.
See also [method
Gtk.PrintSettings.set_page_ranges].The
See morePageRangeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPageRangeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePageRange. Alternatively, usePageRangeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PageRangeProtocol
-
GtkPaperSizehandles paper sizes.It uses the standard called PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG: Standard for Media Standardized Names to name the paper sizes (and to get the data for the page sizes). In addition to standard paper sizes,
GtkPaperSizeallows to construct custom paper sizes with arbitrary dimensions.The
GtkPaperSizeobject stores not only the dimensions (width and height) of a paper size and its name, it also provides default print margins.The
See morePaperSizeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPaperSizeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePaperSize. Alternatively, usePaperSizeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PaperSizeProtocol
-
The
See morePasswordEntryBufferClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPasswordEntryBufferClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePasswordEntryBufferClass. Alternatively, usePasswordEntryBufferClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PasswordEntryBufferClassProtocol
-
The
See morePasswordEntryClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPasswordEntryClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePasswordEntryClass. Alternatively, usePasswordEntryClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PasswordEntryClassProtocol
-
The
See morePictureClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPictureClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePictureClass. Alternatively, usePictureClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PictureClassProtocol
-
The
See morePopoverClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPopoverClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePopoverClass. Alternatively, usePopoverClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PopoverClassProtocol
-
The
See morePrintBackendProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintBackendinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintBackend. Alternatively, usePrintBackendRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintBackendProtocol
-
The
See morePrintOperationClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintOperationClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintOperationClass. Alternatively, usePrintOperationClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintOperationClassProtocol
-
The
See morePrintOperationPreviewIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintOperationPreviewIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintOperationPreviewIface. Alternatively, usePrintOperationPreviewIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintOperationPreviewIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreRangeClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRangeClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRangeClass. Alternatively, useRangeClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RangeClassProtocol
-
A
GtkPageSetupobject stores the page size, orientation and margins.The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog and then pass it to the
GtkPrintOperationwhen printing. The benefit of splitting this out of theGtkPrintSettingsis that these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set long before user prints.Margins
The margins specified in this object are the “print margins”, i.e. the parts of the page that the printer cannot print on. These are different from the layout margins that a word processor uses; they are typically used to determine the minimal size for the layout margins.
To obtain a
GtkPageSetupuse [ctorGtk.PageSetup.new] to get the defaults, or use [funcGtk.print_run_page_setup_dialog] to show the page setup dialog and receive the resulting page setup.A page setup dialog
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL; static GtkPageSetup *page_setup = NULL; static void do_page_setup (void) { GtkPageSetup *new_page_setup; if (settings == NULL) settings = gtk_print_settings_new (); new_page_setup = gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog (GTK_WINDOW (main_window), page_setup, settings); if (page_setup) g_object_unref (page_setup); page_setup = new_page_setup; }The
See morePageSetupProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPageSetupinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePageSetup. Alternatively, usePageSetupRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PageSetupProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkPageSetupUnixDialogimplements a page setup dialog for platforms which don’t provide a native page setup dialog, like Unix.
It can be used very much like any other GTK dialog, at the cost of the portability offered by the high-level printing API in [class
Gtk.PrintOperation].The
See morePageSetupUnixDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPageSetupUnixDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePageSetupUnixDialog. Alternatively, usePageSetupUnixDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PageSetupUnixDialogProtocol : DialogProtocol
-
GtkPanedhas two panes, arranged either horizontally or vertically.
The division between the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging a handle.
Child widgets are added to the panes of the widget with [method
Gtk.Paned.set_start_child] and [methodGtk.Paned.set_end_child]. The division between the two children is set by default from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the user.A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space in which the separator is called the gutter.) Often, it is useful to put each child inside a [class
Gtk.Frame] so that the gutter appears as a ridge. No separator is drawn if one of the children is missing.Each child has two options that can be set,
resizeandshrink. Ifresizeis true, then when theGtkPanedis resized, that child will expand or shrink along with the paned widget. Ifshrinkis true, then that child can be made smaller than its requisition by the user. Settingshrinktofalseallows the application to set a minimum size. Ifresizeis false for both children, then this is treated as ifresizeis true for both children.The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set by the user, by calling [method
Gtk.Paned.set_position].CSS nodes
paned ├── <child> ├── separator[.wide] ╰── <child>GtkPanedhas a main CSS node with name paned, and a subnode for the separator with name separator. The subnode gets a .wide style class when the paned is supposed to be wide.In horizontal orientation, the nodes are arranged based on the text direction, so in left-to-right mode, :first-child will select the leftmost child, while it will select the rightmost child in RTL layouts.
Creating a paned widget with minimum sizes.
GtkWidget *hpaned = gtk_paned_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); GtkWidget *frame1 = gtk_frame_new (NULL); GtkWidget *frame2 = gtk_frame_new (NULL); gtk_widget_set_size_request (hpaned, 200, -1); gtk_paned_set_start_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame1); gtk_paned_set_start_child_resize (GTK_PANED (hpaned), TRUE); gtk_paned_set_start_child_shrink (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE); gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame1, 50, -1); gtk_paned_set_end_child (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame2); gtk_paned_set_end_child_resize (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE); gtk_paned_set_end_child_shrink (GTK_PANED (hpaned), FALSE); gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame2, 50, -1);The
See morePanedProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPanedinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePaned. Alternatively, usePanedRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PanedProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A
GParamSpecfor properties holding aGtkExpression.The
See moreParamSpecExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkParamSpecExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeParamSpecExpression. Alternatively, useParamSpecExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ParamSpecExpressionProtocol : ParamSpecProtocol
-
GtkPasswordEntryis an entry that has been tailored for entering secrets.
It does not show its contents in clear text, does not allow to copy it to the clipboard, and it shows a warning when Caps Lock is engaged. If the underlying platform allows it,
GtkPasswordEntrywill also place the text in a non-pageable memory area, to avoid it being written out to disk by the operating system.Optionally, it can offer a way to reveal the contents in clear text.
GtkPasswordEntryprovides only minimal API and should be used with the [ifaceGtk.Editable] API.CSS Nodes
entry.password ╰── text ├── image.caps-lock-indicator ┊GtkPasswordEntryhas a single CSS node with name entry that carries a .passwordstyle class. The text Css node below it has a child with name image and style class .caps-lock-indicator for the Caps Lock icon, and possibly other children.Accessibility
GtkPasswordEntryuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOXrole.The
See morePasswordEntryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPasswordEntryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePasswordEntry. Alternatively, usePasswordEntryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PasswordEntryProtocol : EditableProtocol
-
A
GtkEntryBufferthat locks the underlying memory to prevent it from being swapped to disk.GtkPasswordEntryuses aGtkPasswordEntryBuffer.The
See morePasswordEntryBufferProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPasswordEntryBufferinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePasswordEntryBuffer. Alternatively, usePasswordEntryBufferRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PasswordEntryBufferProtocol : EntryBufferProtocol
-
The
GtkPicturewidget displays aGdkPaintable.
Many convenience functions are provided to make pictures simple to use. For example, if you want to load an image from a file, and then display it, there’s a convenience function to do this:
GtkWidget *widget = gtk_picture_new_for_filename ("myfile.png");If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the picture will contain a “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers. If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself, for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with [ctor
Gdk.Texture.new_from_file], then create theGtkPicturewith [ctorGtk.Picture.new_for_paintable].Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data files, such as image files. See the documentation of
GResourcefor details. In this case, [ctorGtk.Picture.new_for_resource] and [methodGtk.Picture.set_resource] should be used.GtkPicturedisplays an image at its natural size. See [classGtk.Image] if you want to display a fixed-size image, such as an icon.Sizing the paintable
You can influence how the paintable is displayed inside the
GtkPicture. By turning off [propertyGtk.Picture:keep-aspect-ratio] you can allow the paintable to get stretched. [propertyGtk.Picture:can-shrink] can be unset to make sure that paintables are never made smaller than their ideal size - but be careful if you do not know the size of the paintable in use (like when displaying user-loaded images). This can easily cause the picture to grow larger than the screen. And [propertyGtkWidget:halign] and [propertyGtkWidget:valign] can be used to make sure the paintable doesn’t fill all available space but is instead displayed at its original size.CSS nodes
GtkPicturehas a single CSS node with the namepicture.Accessibility
GtkPictureuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_IMGrole.The
See morePictureProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPictureinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePicture. Alternatively, usePictureRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PictureProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkPopoveris a bubble-like context popup.
It is primarily meant to provide context-dependent information or options. Popovers are attached to a parent widget. By default, they point to the whole widget area, although this behavior can be changed with [method
Gtk.Popover.set_pointing_to].The position of a popover relative to the widget it is attached to can also be changed with [method
Gtk.Popover.set_position]By default,
GtkPopoverperforms a grab, in order to ensure input events get redirected to it while it is shown, and also so the popover is dismissed in the expected situations (clicks outside the popover, or the Escape key being pressed). If no such modal behavior is desired on a popover, [methodGtk.Popover.set_autohide] may be called on it to tweak its behavior.GtkPopover as menu replacement
GtkPopoveris often used to replace menus. The best was to do this is to use the [classGtk.PopoverMenu] subclass which supports being populated from aGMenuModelwith [ctorGtk.PopoverMenu.new_from_model].<section> <attribute name="display-hint">horizontal-buttons</attribute> <item> <attribute name="label">Cut</attribute> <attribute name="action">app.cut</attribute> <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-cut-symbolic</attribute> </item> <item> <attribute name="label">Copy</attribute> <attribute name="action">app.copy</attribute> <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-copy-symbolic</attribute> </item> <item> <attribute name="label">Paste</attribute> <attribute name="action">app.paste</attribute> <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-paste-symbolic</attribute> </item> </section>CSS nodes
popover[.menu] ├── arrow ╰── contents.background ╰── <child>The contents child node always gets the .background style class and the popover itself gets the .menu style class if the popover is menu-like (i.e.
GtkPopoverMenu).Particular uses of
GtkPopover, such as touch selection popups or magnifiers inGtkEntryorGtkTextViewget style classes like .touch-selection or .magnifier to differentiate from plain popovers.When styling a popover directly, the popover node should usually not have any background. The visible part of the popover can have a shadow. To specify it in CSS, set the box-shadow of the contents node.
Note that, in order to accomplish appropriate arrow visuals,
GtkPopoveruses custom drawing for the arrow node. This makes it possible for the arrow to change its shape dynamically, but it also limits the possibilities of styling it using CSS. In particular, the arrow gets drawn over the content node’s border and shadow, so they look like one shape, which means that the border width of the content node and the arrow node should be the same. The arrow also does not support any border shape other than solid, no border-radius, only one border width (border-bottom-width is used) and no box-shadow.The
See morePopoverProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPopoverinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePopover. Alternatively, usePopoverRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PopoverProtocol : NativeProtocol, ShortcutManagerProtocol
-
GtkPopoverMenuis a subclass ofGtkPopoverthat implements menu behavior.
GtkPopoverMenutreats its children like menus and allows switching between them. It can open submenus as traditional, nested submenus, or in a more touch-friendly sliding fashion.GtkPopoverMenuis meant to be used primarily with menu models, using [ctorGtk.PopoverMenu.new_from_model]. If you need to put other widgets such as aGtkSpinButtonor aGtkSwitchinto a popover, you can use [methodGtk.PopoverMenu.add_child].For more dialog-like behavior, use a plain
GtkPopover.Menu models
The XML format understood by
GtkBuilderforGMenuModelconsists of a toplevel<menu>element, which contains one or more<item>elements. Each<item>element contains<attribute>and<link>elements with a mandatory name attribute.<link>elements have the same content model as<menu>. Instead of<link name="submenu">or<link name="section">, you can use<submenu>or<section>elements.<menu id='app-menu'> <section> <item> <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_New Window</attribute> <attribute name='action'>app.new</attribute> </item> <item> <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_About Sunny</attribute> <attribute name='action'>app.about</attribute> </item> <item> <attribute name='label' translatable='yes'>_Quit</attribute> <attribute name='action'>app.quit</attribute> </item> </section> </menu>Attribute values can be translated using gettext, like other
GtkBuildercontent.<attribute>elements can be marked for translation with atranslatable="yes"attribute. It is also possible to specify message context and translator comments, using the context and comments attributes. To make use of this, theGtkBuildermust have been given the gettext domain to use.The following attributes are used when constructing menu items:
- “label”: a user-visible string to display
- “action”: the prefixed name of the action to trigger
- “target”: the parameter to use when activating the action
- “icon” and “verb-icon”: names of icons that may be displayed
- “submenu-action”: name of an action that may be used to track whether a submenu is open
- “hidden-when”: a string used to determine when the item will be hidden.
Possible values include “action-disabled”, “action-missing”, “macos-menubar”.
This is mainly useful for exported menus, see [method
Gtk.Application.set_menubar]. - “custom”: a string used to match against the ID of a custom child added with
[method
Gtk.PopoverMenu.add_child], [methodGtk.PopoverMenuBar.add_child], or in the ui file with<child type="ID">.
The following attributes are used when constructing sections:
- “label”: a user-visible string to use as section heading
- “display-hint”: a string used to determine special formatting for the section. Possible values include “horizontal-buttons”, “circular-buttons” and “inline-buttons”. They all indicate that section should be displayed as a horizontal row of buttons.
- “text-direction”: a string used to determine the
GtkTextDirectionto use when “display-hint” is set to “horizontal-buttons”. Possible values include “rtl”, “ltr”, and “none”.
The following attributes are used when constructing submenus:
- “label”: a user-visible string to display
- “icon”: icon name to display
Menu items will also show accelerators, which are usually associated with actions via [method
Gtk.Application.set_accels_for_action], [idgtk_widget_class_add_binding_action] or [methodGtk.ShortcutController.add_shortcut].CSS Nodes
GtkPopoverMenuis just a subclass ofGtkPopoverthat adds custom content to it, therefore it has the same CSS nodes. It is one of the cases that add a .menu style class to the popover’s main node.Accessibility
GtkPopoverMenuuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENUrole, and its items use theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM,GTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM_CHECKBOXorGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEM_RADIOroles, depending on the action they are connected to.The
See morePopoverMenuProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPopoverMenuinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePopoverMenu. Alternatively, usePopoverMenuRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PopoverMenuProtocol : PopoverProtocol
-
GtkPopoverMenuBarpresents a horizontal bar of items that pop up popover menus when clicked.
The only way to create instances of
GtkPopoverMenuBaris from aGMenuModel.CSS nodes
menubar ├── item[.active] ┊ ╰── popover ╰── item ╰── popoverGtkPopoverMenuBarhas a single CSS node with name menubar, below which each item has its CSS node, and below that the corresponding popover.The item whose popover is currently open gets the .active style class.
Accessibility
GtkPopoverMenuBaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_BARrole, the menu items use theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENU_ITEMrole and the menus use theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_MENUrole.The
See morePopoverMenuBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPopoverMenuBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePopoverMenuBar. Alternatively, usePopoverMenuBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PopoverMenuBarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkPrintContextencapsulates context information that is required when drawing pages for printing.This includes the cairo context and important parameters like page size and resolution. It also lets you easily create [class
Pango.Layout] and [classPango.Context] objects that match the font metrics of the cairo surface.GtkPrintContextobjects get passed to the [signalGtk.PrintOperation::begin-print], [signalGtk.PrintOperation::end-print], [signalGtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup] and [signalGtk.PrintOperation::draw-page] signals on the [classGtk.PrintOperation] object.Using GtkPrintContext in a
draw-pagecallbackstatic void draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation, GtkPrintContext *context, int page_nr) { cairo_t *cr; PangoLayout *layout; PangoFontDescription *desc; cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context); // Draw a red rectangle, as wide as the paper (inside the margins) cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 1.0, 0, 0); cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, gtk_print_context_get_width (context), 50); cairo_fill (cr); // Draw some lines cairo_move_to (cr, 20, 10); cairo_line_to (cr, 40, 20); cairo_arc (cr, 60, 60, 20, 0, M_PI); cairo_line_to (cr, 80, 20); cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0, 0); cairo_set_line_width (cr, 5); cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND); cairo_set_line_join (cr, CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND); cairo_stroke (cr); // Draw some text layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context); pango_layout_set_text (layout, "Hello World! Printing is easy", -1); desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 28"); pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc); pango_font_description_free (desc); cairo_move_to (cr, 30, 20); pango_cairo_layout_path (cr, layout); // Font Outline cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.93, 1.0, 0.47); cairo_set_line_width (cr, 0.5); cairo_stroke_preserve (cr); // Font Fill cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0.0, 1.0); cairo_fill (cr); g_object_unref (layout); }The
See morePrintContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintContext. Alternatively, usePrintContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintContextProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkPrintJobobject represents a job that is sent to a printer.You only need to deal directly with print jobs if you use the non-portable [class
Gtk.PrintUnixDialog] API.Use [method
Gtk.PrintJob.get_surface] to obtain the cairo surface onto which the pages must be drawn. Use [methodGtk.PrintJob.send] to send the finished job to the printer. If you don’t use cairoGtkPrintJobalso supports printing of manually generated PostScript, via [methodGtk.PrintJob.set_source_file].The
See morePrintJobProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintJobinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintJob. Alternatively, usePrintJobRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintJobProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkPrintOperationis the high-level, portable printing API.It looks a bit different than other GTK dialogs such as the
GtkFileChooser, since some platforms don’t expose enough infrastructure to implement a good print dialog. On such platforms,GtkPrintOperationuses the native print dialog. On platforms which do not provide a native print dialog, GTK uses its own, see [classGtk.PrintUnixDialog].The typical way to use the high-level printing API is to create a
GtkPrintOperationobject with [ctorGtk.PrintOperation.new] when the user selects to print. Then you set some properties on it, e.g. the page size, any [classGtk.PrintSettings] from previous print operations, the number of pages, the current page, etc.Then you start the print operation by calling [method
Gtk.PrintOperation.run]. It will then show a dialog, let the user select a printer and options. When the user finished the dialog, various signals will be emitted on theGtkPrintOperation, the main one being [signalGtk.PrintOperation::draw-page], which you are supposed to handle and render the page on the provided [classGtk.PrintContext] using Cairo.The high-level printing API
static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL; static void do_print (void) { GtkPrintOperation *print; GtkPrintOperationResult res; print = gtk_print_operation_new (); if (settings != NULL) gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings); g_signal_connect (print, "begin_print", G_CALLBACK (begin_print), NULL); g_signal_connect (print, "draw_page", G_CALLBACK (draw_page), NULL); res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG, GTK_WINDOW (main_window), NULL); if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY) { if (settings != NULL) g_object_unref (settings); settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print)); } g_object_unref (print); }By default
GtkPrintOperationuses an external application to do print preview. To implement a custom print preview, an application must connect to the preview signal. The functions [methodGtk.PrintOperationPreview.render_page], [methodGtk.PrintOperationPreview.end_preview] and [methodGtk.PrintOperationPreview.is_selected] are useful when implementing a print preview.The
See morePrintOperationProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintOperationinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintOperation. Alternatively, usePrintOperationRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintOperationProtocol : ObjectProtocol, PrintOperationPreviewProtocol
-
A
GtkPrintSettingsobject represents the settings of a print dialog in a system-independent way.The main use for this object is that once you’ve printed you can get a settings object that represents the settings the user chose, and the next time you print you can pass that object in so that the user doesn’t have to re-set all his settings.
Its also possible to enumerate the settings so that you can easily save the settings for the next time your app runs, or even store them in a document. The predefined keys try to use shared values as much as possible so that moving such a document between systems still works.
The
See morePrintSettingsProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintSettingsinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintSettings. Alternatively, usePrintSettingsRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintSettingsProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkPrintUnixDialogimplements a print dialog for platforms which don’t provide a native print dialog, like Unix.
It can be used very much like any other GTK dialog, at the cost of the portability offered by the high-level printing API with [class
Gtk.PrintOperation].In order to print something with
GtkPrintUnixDialog, you need to use [methodGtk.PrintUnixDialog.get_selected_printer] to obtain a [classGtk.Printer] object and use it to construct a [classGtk.PrintJob] using [ctorGtk.PrintJob.new].GtkPrintUnixDialoguses the following response values:GTK_RESPONSE_OK:for the “Print” buttonGTK_RESPONSE_APPLY:for the “Preview” buttonGTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL:for the “Cancel” button
GtkPrintUnixDialog as GtkBuildable
The
GtkPrintUnixDialogimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface exposes itsnotebookinternal children with the name “notebook”.An example of a
GtkPrintUnixDialogUI definition fragment:<object class="GtkPrintUnixDialog" id="dialog1"> <child internal-child="notebook"> <object class="GtkNotebook" id="notebook"> <child> <object type="GtkNotebookPage"> <property name="tab_expand">False</property> <property name="tab_fill">False</property> <property name="tab"> <object class="GtkLabel" id="tablabel"> <property name="label">Tab label</property> </object> </property> <property name="child"> <object class="GtkLabel" id="tabcontent"> <property name="label">Content on notebook tab</property> </object> </property> </object> </child> </object> </child> </object>CSS nodes
GtkPrintUnixDialoghas a single CSS node with name window. The style classes dialog and print are added.The
See morePrintUnixDialogProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrintUnixDialoginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrintUnixDialog. Alternatively, usePrintUnixDialogRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrintUnixDialogProtocol : DialogProtocol
-
A
GtkPrinterobject represents a printer.You only need to deal directly with printers if you use the non-portable [class
Gtk.PrintUnixDialog] API.A
GtkPrinterallows to get status information about the printer, such as its description, its location, the number of queued jobs, etc. Most importantly, aGtkPrinterobject can be used to create a [classGtk.PrintJob] object, which lets you print to the printer.The
See morePrinterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPrinterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePrinter. Alternatively, usePrinterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PrinterProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkProgressBaris typically used to display the progress of a long running operation.It provides a visual clue that processing is underway.
GtkProgressBarcan be used in two different modes: percentage mode and activity mode.
When an application can determine how much work needs to take place (e.g. read a fixed number of bytes from a file) and can monitor its progress, it can use the
GtkProgressBarin percentage mode and the user sees a growing bar indicating the percentage of the work that has been completed. In this mode, the application is required to call [methodGtk.ProgressBar.set_fraction] periodically to update the progress bar.When an application has no accurate way of knowing the amount of work to do, it can use the
GtkProgressBarin activity mode, which shows activity by a block moving back and forth within the progress area. In this mode, the application is required to call [methodGtk.ProgressBar.pulse] periodically to update the progress bar.There is quite a bit of flexibility provided to control the appearance of the
GtkProgressBar. Functions are provided to control the orientation of the bar, optional text can be displayed along with the bar, and the step size used in activity mode can be set.CSS nodes
progressbar[.osd] ├── [text] ╰── trough[.empty][.full] ╰── progress[.pulse]GtkProgressBarhas a main CSS node with name progressbar and subnodes with names text and trough, of which the latter has a subnode named progress. The text subnode is only present if text is shown. The progress subnode has the style class .pulse when in activity mode. It gets the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom added when the progress ‘touches’ the corresponding end of the GtkProgressBar. The .osd class on the progressbar node is for use in overlays like the one Epiphany has for page loading progress.Accessibility
GtkProgressBaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_PROGRESS_BARrole.The
See moreProgressBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkProgressBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeProgressBar. Alternatively, useProgressBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ProgressBarProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A
GObjectproperty value in aGtkExpression.The
See morePropertyExpressionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkPropertyExpressioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seePropertyExpression. Alternatively, usePropertyExpressionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol PropertyExpressionProtocol : ExpressionProtocol
-
GtkRangeis the common base class for widgets which visualize an adjustment.Widgets that are derived from
GtkRangeinclude [classGtk.Scale] and [classGtk.Scrollbar].Apart from signals for monitoring the parameters of the adjustment,
GtkRangeprovides properties and methods for setting a “fill level” on range widgets. See [methodGtk.Range.set_fill_level].The
See moreRangeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRangeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRange. Alternatively, useRangeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RangeProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
Meta-data to be passed to
gtk_recent_manager_add_full()when registering a recently used resource.The
See moreRecentDataProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRecentDatainstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRecentData. Alternatively, useRecentDataRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RecentDataProtocol
-
GtkRecentInfocontains the metadata associated with an item in the recently used files list.The
See moreRecentInfoProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRecentInfoinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRecentInfo. Alternatively, useRecentInfoRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RecentInfoProtocol
-
GtkRecentManagerClasscontains only private data.The
See moreRecentManagerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRecentManagerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRecentManagerClass. Alternatively, useRecentManagerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RecentManagerClassProtocol
-
Represents a request of a screen object in a given orientation. These are primarily used in container implementations when allocating a natural size for children calling. See
gtk_distribute_natural_allocation().The
See moreRequestedSizeProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRequestedSizeinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRequestedSize. Alternatively, useRequestedSizeRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RequestedSizeProtocol
-
A
GtkRequisitionrepresents the desired size of a widget. See GtkWidget’s geometry management section for more information.The
See moreRequisitionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRequisitioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRequisition. Alternatively, useRequisitionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RequisitionProtocol
-
The
See moreRootInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRootInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRootInterface. Alternatively, useRootInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RootInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreScaleButtonClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScaleButtonClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScaleButtonClass. Alternatively, useScaleButtonClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScaleButtonClassProtocol
-
GtkRecentManagermanages and looks up recently used files.Each recently used file is identified by its URI, and has meta-data associated to it, like the names and command lines of the applications that have registered it, the number of time each application has registered the same file, the mime type of the file and whether the file should be displayed only by the applications that have registered it.
The recently used files list is per user.
GtkRecentManageracts like a database of all the recently used files. You can create newGtkRecentManagerobjects, but it is more efficient to use the default manager created by GTK.Adding a new recently used file is as simple as:
GtkRecentManager *manager; manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default (); gtk_recent_manager_add_item (manager, file_uri);The
GtkRecentManagerwill try to gather all the needed information from the file itself through GIO.Looking up the meta-data associated with a recently used file given its URI requires calling [method
Gtk.RecentManager.lookup_item]:GtkRecentManager *manager; GtkRecentInfo *info; GError *error = NULL; manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default (); info = gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (manager, file_uri, &error); if (error) { g_warning ("Could not find the file: `s`", error->message); g_error_free (error); } else { // Use the info object gtk_recent_info_unref (info); }In order to retrieve the list of recently used files, you can use [method
Gtk.RecentManager.get_items], which returns a list of [structGtk.RecentInfo].Note that the maximum age of the recently used files list is controllable through the [property
Gtk.Settings:gtk-recent-files-max-age] property.The
See moreRecentManagerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRecentManagerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRecentManager. Alternatively, useRecentManagerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RecentManagerProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkRevealeranimates the transition of its child from invisible to visible.The style of transition can be controlled with [method
Gtk.Revealer.set_transition_type].These animations respect the [property
Gtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations] setting.CSS nodes
GtkRevealerhas a single CSS node with name revealer. When stylingGtkRevealerusing CSS, remember that it only hides its contents, not itself. That means applied margin, padding and borders will be visible even when the [propertyGtk.Revealer:reveal-child] property is set tofalse.Accessibility
GtkRevealeruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The child of
GtkRevealer, if set, is always available in the accessibility tree, regardless of the state of the revealer widget.The
See moreRevealerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRevealerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRevealer. Alternatively, useRevealerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RevealerProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkScaleis a slider control used to select a numeric value.
To use it, you’ll probably want to investigate the methods on its base class, [class
GtkRange], in addition to the methods forGtkScaleitself. To set the value of a scale, you would normally use [methodGtk.Range.set_value]. To detect changes to the value, you would normally use the [signalGtk.Range::value-changed] signal.Note that using the same upper and lower bounds for the
GtkScale(through theGtkRangemethods) will hide the slider itself. This is useful for applications that want to show an undeterminate value on the scale, without changing the layout of the application (such as movie or music players).GtkScale as GtkBuildable
GtkScalesupports a custom <marks> element, which can contain multiple <mark> elements. The “value” and “position” attributes have the same meaning as [methodGtk.Scale.add_mark] parameters of the same name. If the element is not empty, its content is taken as the markup to show at the mark. It can be translated with the usual ”translatable” and “context” attributes.CSS nodes
scale[.fine-tune][.marks-before][.marks-after] ├── [value][.top][.right][.bottom][.left] ├── marks.top │ ├── mark │ ┊ ├── [label] │ ┊ ╰── indicator ┊ ┊ │ ╰── mark ├── marks.bottom │ ├── mark │ ┊ ├── indicator │ ┊ ╰── [label] ┊ ┊ │ ╰── mark ╰── trough ├── [fill] ├── [highlight] ╰── sliderGtkScalehas a main CSS node with name scale and a subnode for its contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scale is in ‘fine-tuning’ mode.
If the scale has an origin (see [method
Gtk.Scale.set_has_origin]), there is a subnode with name highlight below the trough node that is used for rendering the highlighted part of the trough.If the scale is showing a fill level (see [method
Gtk.Range.set_show_fill_level]), there is a subnode with name fill below the trough node that is used for rendering the filled in part of the trough.If marks are present, there is a marks subnode before or after the trough node, below which each mark gets a node with name mark. The marks nodes get either the .top or .bottom style class.
The mark node has a subnode named indicator. If the mark has text, it also has a subnode named label. When the mark is either above or left of the scale, the label subnode is the first when present. Otherwise, the indicator subnode is the first.
The main CSS node gets the ‘marks-before’ and/or ‘marks-after’ style classes added depending on what marks are present.
If the scale is displaying the value (see [property
Gtk.Scale:draw-value]), there is subnode with name value. This node will get the .top or .bottom style classes similar to the marks node.Accessibility
GtkScaleuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SLIDERrole.The
See moreScaleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScaleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScale. Alternatively, useScaleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScaleProtocol : RangeProtocol
-
GtkRootis the interface implemented by all widgets that can act as a toplevel widget.The root widget takes care of providing the connection to the windowing system and manages layout, drawing and event delivery for its widget hierarchy.
The obvious example of a
GtkRootisGtkWindow.To get the display to which a
GtkRootbelongs, use [methodGtk.Root.get_display].GtkRootalso maintains the location of keyboard focus inside its widget hierarchy, with [methodGtk.Root.set_focus] and [methodGtk.Root.get_focus].The
See moreRootProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkRootinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeRoot. Alternatively, useRootRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol RootProtocol : NativeProtocol
-
GtkScrollableis an interface for widgets with native scrolling ability.To implement this interface you should override the [property
Gtk.Scrollable:hadjustment] and [propertyGtk.Scrollable:vadjustment] properties.Creating a scrollable widget
All scrollable widgets should do the following.
When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments, the widget should populate the adjustments’ [property
Gtk.Adjustment:lower], [propertyGtk.Adjustment:upper], [propertyGtk.Adjustment:step-increment], [propertyGtk.Adjustment:page-increment] and [propertyGtk.Adjustment:page-size] properties and connect to the [signalGtk.Adjustment::value-changed] signal.Because its preferred size is the size for a fully expanded widget, the scrollable widget must be able to cope with underallocations. This means that it must accept any value passed to its [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.size_allocate] implementation.When the parent allocates space to the scrollable child widget, the widget should update the adjustments’ properties with new values.
When any of the adjustments emits the [signal
Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed] signal, the scrollable widget should scroll its contents.
The
See moreScrollableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScrollableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScrollable. Alternatively, useScrollableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScrollableProtocol
-
GtkScaleButtonprovides a button which pops up a scale widget.This kind of widget is commonly used for volume controls in multimedia applications, and GTK provides a [class
Gtk.VolumeButton] subclass that is tailored for this use case.CSS nodes
GtkScaleButtonhas a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plainGtkButton, it gets the .scale style class.The
See moreScaleButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScaleButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScaleButton. Alternatively, useScaleButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScaleButtonProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
The
GtkScrollbarwidget is a horizontal or vertical scrollbar.
Its position and movement are controlled by the adjustment that is passed to or created by [ctor
Gtk.Scrollbar.new]. See [classGtk.Adjustment] for more details. The [propertyGtk.Adjustment:value] field sets the position of the thumb and must be between [propertyGtk.Adjustment:lower] and [propertyGtk.Adjustment:upper] - [propertyGtk.Adjustment:page-size]. The [propertyGtk.Adjustment:page-size] represents the size of the visible scrollable area.The fields [property
Gtk.Adjustment:step-increment] and [propertyGtk.Adjustment:page-increment] fields are added to or subtracted from the [propertyGtk.Adjustment:value] when the user asks to move by a step (using e.g. the cursor arrow keys) or by a page (using e.g. the Page Down/Up keys).CSS nodes
scrollbar ╰── range[.fine-tune] ╰── trough ╰── sliderGtkScrollbarhas a main CSS node with name scrollbar and a subnode for its contents. The main node gets the .horizontal or .vertical style classes applied, depending on the scrollbar’s orientation.The range node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scrollbar is in ‘fine-tuning’ mode.
Other style classes that may be added to scrollbars inside [class
Gtk.ScrolledWindow] include the positional classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering).Accessibility
GtkScrollbaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SCROLLBARrole.The
See moreScrollbarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScrollbarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScrollbar. Alternatively, useScrollbarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScrollbarProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkScrolledWindowis a container that makes its child scrollable.It does so using either internally added scrollbars or externally associated adjustments, and optionally draws a frame around the child.
Widgets with native scrolling support, i.e. those whose classes implement the [iface
Gtk.Scrollable] interface, are added directly. For other types of widget, the class [classGtk.Viewport] acts as an adaptor, giving scrollability to other widgets. [methodGtk.ScrolledWindow.set_child] intelligently accounts for whether or not the added child is aGtkScrollable. If it isn’t, then it wraps the child in aGtkViewport. Therefore, you can just add any child widget and not worry about the details.If [method
Gtk.ScrolledWindow.set_child] has added aGtkViewportfor you, you can remove both your added child widget from theGtkViewport, and theGtkViewportfrom theGtkScrolledWindow, like this:GtkWidget *scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (); GtkWidget *child_widget = gtk_button_new (); // GtkButton is not a GtkScrollable, so GtkScrolledWindow will automatically // add a GtkViewport. gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window), child_widget); // Either of these will result in child_widget being unparented: gtk_box_remove (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window), child_widget); // or gtk_box_remove (GTK_BOX (scrolled_window), gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (scrolled_window)));Unless [property
Gtk.ScrolledWindow:hscrollbar-policy] and [propertyGtk.ScrolledWindow:vscrollbar-policy] areGTK_POLICY_NEVERorGTK_POLICY_EXTERNAL,GtkScrolledWindowadds internalGtkScrollbarwidgets around its child. The scroll position of the child, and if applicable the scrollbars, is controlled by the [propertyGtk.ScrolledWindow:hadjustment] and [propertyGtk.ScrolledWindow:vadjustment] that are associated with theGtkScrolledWindow. See the docs on [classGtk.Scrollbar] for the details, but note that the “step_increment” and “page_increment” fields are only effective if the policy causes scrollbars to be present.If a
GtkScrolledWindowdoesn’t behave quite as you would like, or doesn’t have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up your own scrolling withGtkScrollbarand for example aGtkGrid.Touch support
GtkScrolledWindowhas built-in support for touch devices. When a touchscreen is used, swiping will move the scrolled window, and will expose ‘kinetic’ behavior. This can be turned off with the [propertyGtk.ScrolledWindow:kinetic-scrolling] property if it is undesired.GtkScrolledWindowalso displays visual ‘overshoot’ indication when the content is pulled beyond the end, and this situation can be captured with the [signalGtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-overshot] signal.If no mouse device is present, the scrollbars will overlaid as narrow, auto-hiding indicators over the content. If traditional scrollbars are desired although no mouse is present, this behaviour can be turned off with the [property
Gtk.ScrolledWindow:overlay-scrolling] property.CSS nodes
GtkScrolledWindowhas a main CSS node with name scrolledwindow. It gets a .frame style class added when [propertyGtk.ScrolledWindow:has-frame] istrue.It uses subnodes with names overshoot and undershoot to draw the overflow and underflow indications. These nodes get the .left, .right, .top or .bottom style class added depending on where the indication is drawn.
GtkScrolledWindowalso sets the positional style classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering) on its scrollbars.If both scrollbars are visible, the area where they meet is drawn with a subnode named junction.
Accessibility
GtkScrolledWindowuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreScrolledWindowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScrolledWindowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScrolledWindow. Alternatively, useScrolledWindowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScrolledWindowProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkSearchBaris a container made to have a search entry.
It can also contain additional widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons. The search bar would appear when a search is started through typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.
For keyboard presses to start a search, the search bar must be told of a widget to capture key events from through [method
Gtk.SearchBar.set_key_capture_widget]. This widget will typically be the top-level window, or a parent container of the search bar. Common shortcuts such as Ctrl+F should be handled as an application action, or through the menu items.You will also need to tell the search bar about which entry you are using as your search entry using [method
Gtk.SearchBar.connect_entry].Creating a search bar
The following example shows you how to create a more complex search entry.
CSS nodes
searchbar ╰── revealer ╰── box ├── [child] ╰── [button.close]GtkSearchBarhas a main CSS node with name searchbar. It has a child node with name revealer that contains a node with name box. The box node contains both the CSS node of the child widget as well as an optional button node which gets the .close style class applied.Accessibility
GtkSearchBaruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEARCHrole.The
See moreSearchBarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSearchBarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSearchBar. Alternatively, useSearchBarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SearchBarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkSearchEntryis an entry widget that has been tailored for use as a search entry.The main API for interacting with a
GtkSearchEntryas entry is theGtkEditableinterface.
It will show an inactive symbolic “find” icon when the search entry is empty, and a symbolic “clear” icon when there is text. Clicking on the “clear” icon will empty the search entry.
To make filtering appear more reactive, it is a good idea to not react to every change in the entry text immediately, but only after a short delay. To support this,
GtkSearchEntryemits the [signalGtk.SearchEntry::search-changed] signal which can be used instead of the [signalGtk.Editable::changed] signal.The [signal
Gtk.SearchEntry::previous-match], [signalGtk.SearchEntry::next-match] and [signalGtk.SearchEntry::stop-search] signals can be used to implement moving between search results and ending the search.Often,
GtkSearchEntrywill be fed events by means of being placed inside a [classGtk.SearchBar]. If that is not the case, you can use [methodGtk.SearchEntry.set_key_capture_widget] to let it capture key input from another widget.GtkSearchEntryprovides only minimal API and should be used with the [ifaceGtk.Editable] API.CSS Nodes
entry.search ╰── textGtkSearchEntryhas a single CSS node with name entry that carries a.searchstyle class, and the text node is a child of that.Accessibility
GtkSearchEntryuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEARCH_BOXrole.The
See moreSearchEntryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSearchEntryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSearchEntry. Alternatively, useSearchEntryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SearchEntryProtocol : EditableProtocol
-
GtkSelectionFilterModelis a list model that presents the selection from aGtkSelectionModel.The
See moreSelectionFilterModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSelectionFilterModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSelectionFilterModel. Alternatively, useSelectionFilterModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SelectionFilterModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkSeparatoris a horizontal or vertical separator widget.
A
GtkSeparatorcan be used to group the widgets within a window. It displays a line with a shadow to make it appear sunken into the interface.CSS nodes
GtkSeparatorhas a single CSS node with name separator. The node gets one of the .horizontal or .vertical style classes.Accessibility
GtkSeparatoruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SEPARATORrole.The
See moreSeparatorProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSeparatorinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSeparator. Alternatively, useSeparatorRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SeparatorProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkSettingsprovides a mechanism to share global settings between applications.On the X window system, this sharing is realized by an XSettings manager that is usually part of the desktop environment, along with utilities that let the user change these settings.
On Wayland, the settings are obtained either via a settings portal, or by reading desktop settings from DConf.
In the absence of these sharing mechanisms, GTK reads default values for settings from
settings.inifiles in/etc/gtk-4.0,$XDG_CONFIG_DIRS/gtk-4.0and$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0. These files must be valid key files (seeGKeyFile), and have a section called Settings. Themes can also provide default values for settings by installing asettings.inifile next to theirgtk.cssfile.Applications can override system-wide settings by setting the property of the
GtkSettingsobject withg_object_set(). This should be restricted to special cases though;GtkSettingsare not meant as an application configuration facility.There is one
GtkSettingsinstance per display. It can be obtained with [funcGtk.Settings.get_for_display], but in many cases, it is more convenient to use [methodGtk.Widget.get_settings].The
See moreSettingsProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSettingsinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSettings. Alternatively, useSettingsRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SettingsProtocol : ObjectProtocol, StyleProviderProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutdescribes a keyboard shortcut.It contains a description of how to trigger the shortcut via a [class
Gtk.ShortcutTrigger] and a way to activate the shortcut on a widget via a [classGtk.ShortcutAction].The actual work is usually done via [class
Gtk.ShortcutController], which decides if and when to activate a shortcut. Using that controller directly however is rarely necessary as various higher level convenience APIs exist onGtkWidgets that make it easier to use shortcuts in GTK.GtkShortcutdoes provide functionality to make it easy for users to work with shortcuts, either by providing informational strings for display purposes or by allowing shortcuts to be configured.The
See moreShortcutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcut. Alternatively, useShortcutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkShortcutActionencodes an action that can be triggered by a keyboard shortcut.GtkShortcutActionscontain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.All
GtkShortcutActionsare immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a action, you have to replace it with a new one. If you need to pass arguments to an action, these are specified by the higher-levelGtkShortcutobject.To activate a
GtkShortcutActionmanually, [methodGtk.ShortcutAction.activate] can be called.GTK provides various actions:
- [class
Gtk.MnemonicAction]: a shortcut action that callsgtk_widget_mnemonic_activate() - [class
Gtk.CallbackAction]: a shortcut action that invokes a given callback - [class
Gtk.SignalAction]: a shortcut action that emits a given signal - [class
Gtk.ActivateAction]: a shortcut action that callsgtk_widget_activate() - [class
Gtk.NamedAction]: a shortcut action that callsgtk_widget_activate_action() - [class
Gtk.NothingAction]: a shortcut action that does nothing
The
See moreShortcutActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutAction. Alternatively, useShortcutActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutActionProtocol : ObjectProtocol - [class
-
GtkShortcutControlleris an event controller that manages shortcuts.Most common shortcuts are using this controller implicitly, e.g. by adding a mnemonic underline to a
GtkLabel, or by installing a key binding using [methodGtk.WidgetClass.add_binding], or by adding accelerators to global actions using [methodGtk.Application.set_accels_for_action].But it is possible to create your own shortcut controller, and add shortcuts to it.
GtkShortcutControllerimplementsGListModelfor querying the shortcuts that have been added to it.GtkShortcutController as a GtkBuildable
GtkShortcutControllerscan be creates in ui files to set up shortcuts in the same place as the widgets.An example of a UI definition fragment with
GtkShortcutController:<object class='GtkButton'> <child> <object class='GtkShortcutController'> <property name='scope'>managed</property> <child> <object class='GtkShortcut'> <property name='trigger'><Control>k</property> <property name='action'>activate</property> </object> </child> </object> </child> </object>This example creates a [class
Gtk.ActivateAction] for triggering theactivatesignal of theGtkButton. See [ctorGtk.ShortcutAction.parse_string] for the syntax for other kinds ofGtkShortcutAction. See [ctorGtk.ShortcutTrigger.parse_string] to learn more about the syntax for triggers.The
See moreShortcutControllerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutControllerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutController. Alternatively, useShortcutControllerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutControllerProtocol : ListModelProtocol, BuildableProtocol, EventControllerProtocol
-
GtkShortcutLabeldisplays a single keyboard shortcut or gesture.The main use case for
GtkShortcutLabelis inside a [classGtk.ShortcutsWindow].The
See moreShortcutLabelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutLabelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutLabel. Alternatively, useShortcutLabelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutLabelProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkShortcutTriggertracks how aGtkShortcutshould be activated.To find out if a
GtkShortcutTriggertriggers, you can call [methodGtk.ShortcutTrigger.trigger] on aGdkEvent.GtkShortcutTriggerscontain functions that allow easy presentation to end users as well as being printed for debugging.All
GtkShortcutTriggersare immutable, you can only specify their properties during construction. If you want to change a trigger, you have to replace it with a new one.The
See moreShortcutTriggerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutTriggerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutTrigger. Alternatively, useShortcutTriggerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutTriggerProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutsGrouprepresents a group of related keyboard shortcuts or gestures.The group has a title. It may optionally be associated with a view of the application, which can be used to show only relevant shortcuts depending on the application context.
This widget is only meant to be used with [class
Gtk.ShortcutsWindow].The
See moreShortcutsGroupProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsGroupinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsGroup. Alternatively, useShortcutsGroupRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsGroupProtocol : BoxProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutsSectioncollects all the keyboard shortcuts and gestures for a major application mode.If your application needs multiple sections, you should give each section a unique [property
Gtk.ShortcutsSection:section-name] and a [propertyGtk.ShortcutsSection:title] that can be shown in the section selector of the [classGtk.ShortcutsWindow].The [property
Gtk.ShortcutsSection:max-height] property can be used to influence how the groups in the section are distributed over pages and columns.This widget is only meant to be used with [class
Gtk.ShortcutsWindow].The
See moreShortcutsSectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsSectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsSection. Alternatively, useShortcutsSectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsSectionProtocol : BoxProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutsShortcutrepresents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture with a short text.This widget is only meant to be used with
GtkShortcutsWindow.The
See moreShortcutsShortcutProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsShortcutinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsShortcut. Alternatively, useShortcutsShortcutRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsShortcutProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutsWindowshows information about the keyboard shortcuts and gestures of an application.The shortcuts can be grouped, and you can have multiple sections in this window, corresponding to the major modes of your application.
Additionally, the shortcuts can be filtered by the current view, to avoid showing information that is not relevant in the current application context.
The recommended way to construct a
GtkShortcutsWindowis with [classGtk.Builder], by populating aGtkShortcutsWindowwith one or moreGtkShortcutsSectionobjects, which containGtkShortcutsGroupsthat in turn contain objects of classGtkShortcutsShortcut.A simple example:

This example has as single section. As you can see, the shortcut groups are arranged in columns, and spread across several pages if there are too many to find on a single page.
The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple views:

This example shows a
GtkShortcutsWindowthat has been configured to show only the shortcuts relevant to the “stopwatch” view.The .ui file for this example can be found here.
An example with multiple sections:

This example shows a
GtkShortcutsWindowwith two sections, “Editor Shortcuts” and “Terminal Shortcuts”.The .ui file for this example can be found here.
The
See moreShortcutsWindowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsWindowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsWindow. Alternatively, useShortcutsWindowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsWindowProtocol : WindowProtocol
-
A
GtkShortcutAction that emits a signal.Signals that are used in this way are referred to as keybinding signals, and they are expected to be defined with the
G_SIGNAL_ACTIONflag.The
See moreSignalActionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSignalActioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSignalAction. Alternatively, useSignalActionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SignalActionProtocol : ShortcutActionProtocol
-
GtkSignalListItemFactoryis aGtkListItemFactorythat emits signals to to manage listitems.Signals are emitted for every listitem in the same order:
[signal
Gtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup] is emitted to set up permanent things on the listitem. This usually means constructing the widgets used in the row and adding them to the listitem.[signal
Gtk.SignalListItemFactory::bind] is emitted to bind the item passed via [propertyGtk.ListItem:item] to the widgets that have been created in step 1 or to add item-specific widgets. Signals are connected to listen to changes - both to changes in the item to update the widgets or to changes in the widgets to update the item. After this signal has been called, the listitem may be shown in a list widget.[signal
Gtk.SignalListItemFactory::unbind] is emitted to undo everything done in step 2. Usually this means disconnecting signal handlers. Once this signal has been called, the listitem will no longer be used in a list widget.[signal
Gtk.SignalListItemFactory::bind] and [signalGtk.SignalListItemFactory::unbind] may be emitted multiple times again to bind the listitem for use with new items. By reusing listitems, potentially costly setup can be avoided. However, it means code needs to make sure to properly clean up the listitem in step 3 so that no information from the previous use leaks into the next use.- [signal
Gtk.SignalListItemFactory::teardown] is emitted to allow undoing the effects of [signalGtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup]. After this signal was emitted on a listitem, the listitem will be destroyed and not be used again.
- [signal
Note that during the signal emissions, changing properties on the
GtkListItems passed will not trigger notify signals as the listitem’s notifications are frozen. Seeg_object_freeze_notify()for details.For tracking changes in other properties in the
GtkListItem, thenotifysignal is recommended. The signal can be connected in the [signalGtk.SignalListItemFactory::setup] signal and removed again during [signalGtk.SignalListItemFactory::teardown].The
See moreSignalListItemFactoryProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSignalListItemFactoryinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSignalListItemFactory. Alternatively, useSignalListItemFactoryRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SignalListItemFactoryProtocol : ListItemFactoryProtocol
-
GtkSingleSelectionis aGtkSelectionModelthat allows selecting a single item.Note that the selection is persistent – if the selected item is removed and re-added in the same
items-changedemission, it stays selected. In particular, this means that changing the sort order of an underlying sort model will preserve the selection.The
See moreSingleSelectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSingleSelectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSingleSelection. Alternatively, useSingleSelectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SingleSelectionProtocol : ObjectProtocol, SelectionModelProtocol
-
GtkSizeGroupgroups widgets together so they all request the same size.This is typically useful when you want a column of widgets to have the same size, but you can’t use a
GtkGrid.In detail, the size requested for each widget in a
GtkSizeGroupis the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode of the size group (see [methodGtk.SizeGroup.set_mode]) determines whether this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in a
GtkSizeGroupto actually be the same size, you need to pack them in such a way that they get the size they request and not more.GtkSizeGroupobjects are referenced by each widget in the size group, so once you have added all widgets to aGtkSizeGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the size group withg_object_unref(). If the widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the size group and drop their references on the size group; when all widgets have been removed, the size group will be freed.Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK will compute the horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type
GTK_SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTALorGTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH, and the vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of typeGTK_SIZE_GROUP_VERTICALorGTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH.Note that only non-contextual sizes of every widget are ever consulted by size groups (since size groups have no knowledge of what size a widget will be allocated in one dimension, it cannot derive how much height a widget will receive for a given width). When grouping widgets that trade height for width in mode
GTK_SIZE_GROUP_VERTICALorGTK_SIZE_GROUP_BOTH:the height for the minimum width will be the requested height for all widgets in the group. The same is of course true when horizontally grouping width for height widgets.Widgets that trade height-for-width should set a reasonably large minimum width by way of [property
Gtk.Label:width-chars] for instance. Widgets with static sizes as well as widgets that grow (such as ellipsizing text) need no such considerations.GtkSizeGroup as GtkBuildable
Size groups can be specified in a UI definition by placing an <object> element with
class="GtkSizeGroup"somewhere in the UI definition. The widgets that belong to the size group are specified by a <widgets> element that may contain multiple <widget> elements, one for each member of the size group. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.An example of a UI definition fragment with
GtkSizeGroup:<object class="GtkSizeGroup"> <property name="mode">horizontal</property> <widgets> <widget name="radio1"/> <widget name="radio2"/> </widgets> </object>The
See moreSizeGroupProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSizeGroupinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSizeGroup. Alternatively, useSizeGroupRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SizeGroupProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol
-
GtkSliceListModelis a list model that presents a slice of another model.This is useful when implementing paging by setting the size to the number of elements per page and updating the offset whenever a different page is opened.
The
See moreSliceListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSliceListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSliceListModel. Alternatively, useSliceListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SliceListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkSnapshotassists in creatingGskRenderNodesfor widgets.It functions in a similar way to a cairo context, and maintains a stack of render nodes and their associated transformations.
The node at the top of the stack is the the one that gtk_snapshot_append_… functions operate on. Use the gtk_snapshot_push_… functions and
gtk_snapshot_pop()to change the current node.The typical way to obtain a
GtkSnapshotobject is as an argument to the [vfuncGtk.Widget.snapshot] vfunc. If you need to create your ownGtkSnapshot, use [ctorGtk.Snapshot.new].The
See moreSnapshotProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSnapshotinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSnapshot. Alternatively, useSnapshotRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SnapshotProtocol : SnapshotProtocol
-
A
GListModelthat sorts the elements of an underlying model according to aGtkSorter.The model can be set up to do incremental sorting, so that sorting long lists doesn’t block the UI. See [method
Gtk.SortListModel.set_incremental] for details.GtkSortListModelis a generic model and because of that it cannot take advantage of any external knowledge when sorting. If you run into performance issues withGtkSortListModel, it is strongly recommended that you write your own sorting list model.The
See moreSortListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSortListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSortListModel. Alternatively, useSortListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SortListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkSorteris an object to describe sorting criteria.Its primary user is [class
Gtk.SortListModel]The model will use a sorter to determine the order in which its items should appear by calling [method
Gtk.Sorter.compare] for pairs of items.Sorters may change their sorting behavior through their lifetime. In that case, they will emit the [signal
Gtk.Sorter::changed] signal to notify that the sort order is no longer valid and should be updated by callinggtk_sorter_compare()again.GTK provides various pre-made sorter implementations for common sorting operations. [class
Gtk.ColumnView] has built-in support for sorting lists via the [propertyGtk.ColumnViewColumn:sorter] property, where the user can change the sorting by clicking on list headers.Of course, in particular for large lists, it is also possible to subclass
GtkSorterand provide one’s own sorter.The
See moreSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSorter. Alternatively, useSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SorterProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkSpinButtonis an ideal way to allow the user to set the value of some attribute.
Rather than having to directly type a number into a
GtkEntry,GtkSpinButtonallows the user to click on one of two arrows to increment or decrement the displayed value. A value can still be typed in, with the bonus that it can be checked to ensure it is in a given range.The main properties of a
GtkSpinButtonare through an adjustment. See the [classGtk.Adjustment] documentation for more details about an adjustment’s properties.Note that
GtkSpinButtonwill by default make its entry large enough to accommodate the lower and upper bounds of the adjustment. If this is not desired, the automatic sizing can be turned off by explicitly setting [propertyGtk.Editable:width-chars] to a value != -1.Using a GtkSpinButton to get an integer
// Provides a function to retrieve an integer value from a GtkSpinButton // and creates a spin button to model percentage values. int grab_int_value (GtkSpinButton *button, gpointer user_data) { return gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (button); } void create_integer_spin_button (void) { GtkWidget *window, *button; GtkAdjustment *adjustment; adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (50.0, 0.0, 100.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0); window = gtk_window_new (); // creates the spinbutton, with no decimal places button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 1.0, 0); gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button); gtk_widget_show (window); }Using a GtkSpinButton to get a floating point value
// Provides a function to retrieve a floating point value from a // GtkSpinButton, and creates a high precision spin button. float grab_float_value (GtkSpinButton *button, gpointer user_data) { return gtk_spin_button_get_value (button); } void create_floating_spin_button (void) { GtkWidget *window, *button; GtkAdjustment *adjustment; adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (2.500, 0.0, 5.0, 0.001, 0.1, 0.0); window = gtk_window_new (); // creates the spinbutton, with three decimal places button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 0.001, 3); gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), button); gtk_widget_show (window); }CSS nodes
spinbutton.horizontal ├── text │ ├── undershoot.left │ ╰── undershoot.right ├── button.down ╰── button.upspinbutton.vertical ├── button.up ├── text │ ├── undershoot.left │ ╰── undershoot.right ╰── button.downGtkSpinButtons main CSS node has the name spinbutton. It creates subnodes for the entry and the two buttons, with these names. The button nodes have the style classes .up and .down. TheGtkTextsubnodes (if present) are put below the text node. The orientation of the spin button is reflected in the .vertical or .horizontal style class on the main node.Accessiblity
GtkSpinButtonuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SPIN_BUTTONrole.The
See moreSpinButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSpinButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSpinButton. Alternatively, useSpinButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SpinButtonProtocol : CellEditableProtocol, EditableProtocol, OrientableProtocol
-
A
GtkSpinnerwidget displays an icon-size spinning animation.It is often used as an alternative to a [class
Gtk.ProgressBar] for displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
To start the animation, use [method
Gtk.Spinner.start], to stop it use [methodGtk.Spinner.stop].CSS nodes
GtkSpinnerhas a single CSS node with the name spinner. When the animation is active, the :checked pseudoclass is added to this node.The
See moreSpinnerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSpinnerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSpinner. Alternatively, useSpinnerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SpinnerProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkStackis a container which only shows one of its children at a time.In contrast to
GtkNotebook,GtkStackdoes not provide a means for users to change the visible child. Instead, a separate widget such as [classGtk.StackSwitcher] or [classGtk.StackSidebar] can be used withGtkStackto provide this functionality.Transitions between pages can be animated as slides or fades. This can be controlled with [method
Gtk.Stack.set_transition_type]. These animations respect the [propertyGtk.Settings:gtk-enable-animations] setting.GtkStackmaintains a [classGtk.StackPage] object for each added child, which holds additional per-child properties. You obtain theGtkStackPagefor a child with [methodGtk.Stack.get_page] and you can obtain aGtkSelectionModelcontaining all the pages with [methodGtk.Stack.get_pages].GtkStack as GtkBuildable
To set child-specific properties in a .ui file, create
GtkStackPageobjects explicitly, and set the child widget as a property on it:<object class="GtkStack" id="stack"> <child> <object class="GtkStackPage"> <property name="name">page1</property> <property name="title">In the beginning…</property> <property name="child"> <object class="GtkLabel"> <property name="label">It was dark</property> </object> </property> </object> </child>CSS nodes
GtkStackhas a single CSS node named stack.Accessibility
GtkStackuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_PANELfor the stack pages, which are the accessible parent objects of the child widgets.The
See moreStackProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStackinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStack. Alternatively, useStackRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StackProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkStackPageis an auxiliary class used byGtkStack.The
See moreStackPageProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStackPageinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStackPage. Alternatively, useStackPageRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StackPageProtocol : ObjectProtocol, AccessibleProtocol
-
A
GtkStackSidebaruses a sidebar to switch betweenGtkStackpages.In order to use a
GtkStackSidebar, you simply use aGtkStackto organize your UI flow, and add the sidebar to your sidebar area. You can use [methodGtk.StackSidebar.set_stack] to connect theGtkStackSidebarto theGtkStack.CSS nodes
GtkStackSidebarhas a single CSS node with name stacksidebar and style class .sidebar.When circumstances require it,
GtkStackSidebaradds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.The
See moreStackSidebarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStackSidebarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStackSidebar. Alternatively, useStackSidebarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StackSidebarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
The
GtkStackSwitchershows a row of buttons to switch betweenGtkStackpages.
It acts as a controller for the associated
GtkStack.All the content for the buttons comes from the properties of the stacks [class
Gtk.StackPage] objects; the button visibility in aGtkStackSwitcherwidget is controlled by the visibility of the child in theGtkStack.It is possible to associate multiple
GtkStackSwitcherwidgets with the sameGtkStackwidget.CSS nodes
GtkStackSwitcherhas a single CSS node named stackswitcher and style class .stack-switcher.When circumstances require it,
GtkStackSwitcheradds the .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack pages.Accessibility
GtkStackSwitcheruses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TAB_LISTrole and uses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TABfor its buttons.Orientable
Since GTK 4.4,
GtkStackSwitcherimplementsGtkOrientableallowing the stack switcher to be made vertical withgtk_orientable_set_orientation().The
See moreStackSwitcherProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStackSwitcherinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStackSwitcher. Alternatively, useStackSwitcherRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StackSwitcherProtocol : OrientableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkStatusbarwidget is usually placed along the bottom of an application’s main [classGtk.Window].
A
GtkStatusBarmay provide a regular commentary of the application’s status (as is usually the case in a web browser, for example), or may be used to simply output a message when the status changes, (when an upload is complete in an FTP client, for example).Status bars in GTK maintain a stack of messages. The message at the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a context id that is used to uniquely identify the source of a message. This context id can be generated by [method
Gtk.Statusbar.get_context_id], given a message and the statusbar that it will be added to. Note that messages are stored in a stack, and when choosing which message to display, the stack structure is adhered to, regardless of the context identifier of a message.One could say that a statusbar maintains one stack of messages for display purposes, but allows multiple message producers to maintain sub-stacks of the messages they produced (via context ids).
Status bars are created using [ctor
Gtk.Statusbar.new].Messages are added to the bar’s stack with [method
Gtk.Statusbar.push].The message at the top of the stack can be removed using [method
Gtk.Statusbar.pop]. A message can be removed from anywhere in the stack if its message id was recorded at the time it was added. This is done using [methodGtk.Statusbar.remove].CSS node
GtkStatusbarhas a single CSS node with namestatusbar.The
See moreStatusbarProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStatusbarinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStatusbar. Alternatively, useStatusbarRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StatusbarProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkStringFilterdetermines whether to include items by comparing strings to a fixed search term.The strings are obtained from the items by evaluating a
GtkExpressionset with [methodGtk.StringFilter.set_expression], and they are compared against a search term set with [methodGtk.StringFilter.set_search].GtkStringFilterhas several different modes of comparison - it can match the whole string, just a prefix, or any substring. Use [methodGtk.StringFilter.set_match_mode] choose a mode.It is also possible to make case-insensitive comparisons, with [method
Gtk.StringFilter.set_ignore_case].The
See moreStringFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringFilter. Alternatively, useStringFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringFilterProtocol : FilterProtocol
-
GtkStringListis a list model that wraps an array of strings.The objects in the model have a “string” property.
GtkStringListis well-suited for any place where you would typically use achar*[], but need a list model.GtkStringList as GtkBuildable
The
GtkStringListimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports adding items directly using the <items> element and specifying <item> elements for each item. Each <item> element supports the regular translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.Here is a UI definition fragment specifying a
GtkStringList<object class="GtkStringList"> <items> <item translatable="yes">Factory</item> <item translatable="yes">Home</item> <item translatable="yes">Subway</item> </items> </object>The
See moreStringListProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringListinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringList. Alternatively, useStringListRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringListProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol
-
GtkStringObjectis the type of items in aGtkStringList.A
GtkStringObjectis a wrapper around aconst char*; it has a [propertyGtk.StringObject:string] property.The
See moreStringObjectProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringObjectinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringObject. Alternatively, useStringObjectRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringObjectProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkStringSorteris aGtkSorterthat compares strings.It does the comparison in a linguistically correct way using the current locale by normalizing Unicode strings and possibly case-folding them before performing the comparison.
To obtain the strings to compare, this sorter evaluates a [class
Gtk.Expression].The
See moreStringSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringSorter. Alternatively, useStringSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringSorterProtocol : SorterProtocol
-
GtkStyleContextstores styling information affecting a widget.In order to construct the final style information,
GtkStyleContextqueries information from all attachedGtkStyleProviders. Style providers can be either attached explicitly to the context through [methodGtk.StyleContext.add_provider], or to the display through [funcGtk.StyleContext.add_provider_for_display]. The resulting style is a combination of all providers’ information in priority order.For GTK widgets, any
GtkStyleContextreturned by [methodGtk.Widget.get_style_context] will already have aGdkDisplayand RTL/LTR information set. The style context will also be updated automatically if any of these settings change on the widget.Style Classes
Widgets can add style classes to their context, which can be used to associate different styles by class. The documentation for individual widgets lists which style classes it uses itself, and which style classes may be added by applications to affect their appearance.
Custom styling in UI libraries and applications
If you are developing a library with custom widgets that render differently than standard components, you may need to add a
GtkStyleProvideryourself with theGTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACKpriority, either aGtkCssProvideror a custom object implementing theGtkStyleProviderinterface. This way themes may still attempt to style your UI elements in a different way if needed so.If you are using custom styling on an applications, you probably want then to make your style information prevail to the theme’s, so you must use a
GtkStyleProviderwith theGTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATIONpriority, keep in mind that the user settings inXDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-4.0/gtk.csswill still take precedence over your changes, as it uses theGTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USERpriority.The
See moreStyleContextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStyleContextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStyleContext. Alternatively, useStyleContextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StyleContextProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkSwitchis a “light switch” that has two states: on or off.
The user can control which state should be active by clicking the empty area, or by dragging the handle.
GtkSwitchcan also handle situations where the underlying state changes with a delay. See [signalGtkSwitch::state-set] for details.CSS nodes
switch ├── label ├── label ╰── sliderGtkSwitchhas four css nodes, the main node with the name switch and subnodes for the slider and the on and off labels. Neither of them is using any style classes.Accessibility
GtkSwitchuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_SWITCHrole.The
See moreSwitchProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSwitchinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSwitch. Alternatively, useSwitchRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SwitchProtocol : ActionableProtocol
-
The
GtkTextwidget is a single-line text entry widget.GtkTextis the common implementation of single-line text editing that is shared betweenGtkEntry,GtkPasswordEntry,GtkSpinButtonand other widgets. In all of these,GtkTextis used as the delegate for the [ifaceGtk.Editable] implementation.A fairly large set of key bindings are supported by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor position is visible.
When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information, it can be put into “password mode” using [method
Gtk.Text.set_visibility]. In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character. By default, GTK picks the best invisible character that is available in the current font, but it can be changed with [methodGtk.Text.set_invisible_char].If you are looking to add icons or progress display in an entry, look at
GtkEntry. There other alternatives for more specialized use cases, such asGtkSearchEntry.If you need multi-line editable text, look at
GtkTextView.CSS nodes
text[.read-only] ├── placeholder ├── undershoot.left ├── undershoot.right ├── [selection] ├── [block-cursor] ╰── [window.popup]GtkTexthas a main node with the name text. Depending on the properties of the widget, the .read-only style class may appear.When the entry has a selection, it adds a subnode with the name selection.
When the entry is in overwrite mode, it adds a subnode with the name block-cursor that determines how the block cursor is drawn.
The CSS node for a context menu is added as a subnode below text as well.
The undershoot nodes are used to draw the underflow indication when content is scrolled out of view. These nodes get the .left and .right style classes added depending on where the indication is drawn.
When touch is used and touch selection handles are shown, they are using CSS nodes with name cursor-handle. They get the .top or .bottom style class depending on where they are shown in relation to the selection. If there is just a single handle for the text cursor, it gets the style class .insertion-cursor.
Accessibility
GtkTextuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_NONErole, which causes it to be skipped for accessibility. This is becauseGtkTextis expected to be used as a delegate for aGtkEditableimplementation that will be represented to accessibility.The
See moreTextProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeText. Alternatively, useTextRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextProtocol : EditableProtocol
-
The
See moreScaleClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScaleClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScaleClass. Alternatively, useScaleClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScaleClassProtocol
-
The
See moreScrollableInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkScrollableInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeScrollableInterface. Alternatively, useScrollableInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ScrollableInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreSelectionFilterModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSelectionFilterModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSelectionFilterModelClass. Alternatively, useSelectionFilterModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SelectionFilterModelClassProtocol
-
The list of virtual functions for the
GtkSelectionModelinterface. No function must be implemented, but unlessGtkSelectionModelis_selected()is implemented, it will not be possible to select items in the set.The model does not need to implement any functions to support either selecting or unselecting items. Of course, if the model does not do that, it means that users cannot select or unselect items in a list widget using the model.
All selection functions fall back to
GtkSelectionModelset_selection()so it is sufficient to implement just that function for full selection support.The
See moreSelectionModelInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSelectionModelInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSelectionModelInterface. Alternatively, useSelectionModelInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SelectionModelInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutActionClass. Alternatively, useShortcutActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutActionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutClass. Alternatively, useShortcutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutControllerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutControllerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutControllerClass. Alternatively, useShortcutControllerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutControllerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutLabelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutLabelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutLabelClass. Alternatively, useShortcutLabelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutLabelClassProtocol
-
The list of functions that can be implemented for the
GtkShortcutManagerinterface.Note that no function is mandatory to implement, the default implementation will work fine.
The
See moreShortcutManagerInterfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutManagerInterfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutManagerInterface. Alternatively, useShortcutManagerInterfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutManagerInterfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutTriggerClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutTriggerClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutTriggerClass. Alternatively, useShortcutTriggerClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutTriggerClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutsGroupClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsGroupClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsGroupClass. Alternatively, useShortcutsGroupClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsGroupClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutsSectionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsSectionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsSectionClass. Alternatively, useShortcutsSectionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsSectionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreShortcutsShortcutClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutsShortcutClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutsShortcutClass. Alternatively, useShortcutsShortcutClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutsShortcutClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSignalActionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSignalActionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSignalActionClass. Alternatively, useSignalActionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SignalActionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSignalListItemFactoryClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSignalListItemFactoryClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSignalListItemFactoryClass. Alternatively, useSignalListItemFactoryClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SignalListItemFactoryClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSingleSelectionClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSingleSelectionClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSingleSelectionClass. Alternatively, useSingleSelectionClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SingleSelectionClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSliceListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSliceListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSliceListModelClass. Alternatively, useSliceListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SliceListModelClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSnapshotClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSnapshotClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSnapshotClass. Alternatively, useSnapshotClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SnapshotClassProtocol
-
The
See moreSortListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSortListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSortListModelClass. Alternatively, useSortListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SortListModelClassProtocol
-
The virtual table for
GtkSorter.The
See moreSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSorterClass. Alternatively, useSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreStringFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringFilterClass. Alternatively, useStringFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringFilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreStringListClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringListClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringListClass. Alternatively, useStringListClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringListClassProtocol
-
The
See moreStringObjectClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringObjectClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringObjectClass. Alternatively, useStringObjectClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringObjectClassProtocol
-
The
See moreStringSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStringSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStringSorterClass. Alternatively, useStringSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StringSorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreStyleContextClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStyleContextClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStyleContextClass. Alternatively, useStyleContextClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StyleContextClassProtocol
-
The class structure for
GtkTextBuffer.The
See moreTextBufferClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextBufferClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextBufferClass. Alternatively, useTextBufferClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextBufferClassProtocol
-
GtkSelectionModelis an interface that add support for selection to list models.This support is then used by widgets using list models to add the ability to select and unselect various items.
GTK provides default implementations of the most common selection modes such as [class
Gtk.SingleSelection], so you will only need to implement this interface if you want detailed control about how selections should be handled.A
GtkSelectionModelsupports a single boolean per item indicating if an item is selected or not. This can be queried via [methodGtk.SelectionModel.is_selected]. When the selected state of one or more items changes, the model will emit the [signalGtk.SelectionModel::selection-changed] signal by calling the [methodGtk.SelectionModel.selection_changed] function. The positions given in that signal may have their selection state changed, though that is not a requirement. If new items added to the model via theitems-changedsignal are selected or not is up to the implementation.Note that items added via
items-changedmay already be selected and no [Gtk.SelectionModelselection-changed] will be emitted for them. So to track which items are selected, it is necessary to listen to both signals.Additionally, the interface can expose functionality to select and unselect items. If these functions are implemented, GTK’s list widgets will allow users to select and unselect items. However,
GtkSelectionModels are free to only implement them partially or not at all. In that case the widgets will not support the unimplemented operations.When selecting or unselecting is supported by a model, the return values of the selection functions do not indicate if selection or unselection happened. They are only meant to indicate complete failure, like when this mode of selecting is not supported by the model.
Selections may happen asynchronously, so the only reliable way to find out when an item was selected is to listen to the signals that indicate selection.
The
See moreSelectionModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkSelectionModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeSelectionModel. Alternatively, useSelectionModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol SelectionModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol
-
The
GtkShortcutManagerinterface is used to implement shortcut scopes.This is important for [iface
Gtk.Native] widgets that have their own surface, since the event controllers that are used to implement managed and global scopes are limited to the same native.Examples for widgets implementing
GtkShortcutManagerare [classGtk.Window] and [classGtk.Popover].Every widget that implements
GtkShortcutManagerwill be used as aGTK_SHORTCUT_SCOPE_MANAGED.The
See moreShortcutManagerProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkShortcutManagerinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeShortcutManager. Alternatively, useShortcutManagerRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ShortcutManagerProtocol
-
GtkStyleProvideris an interface for style information used byGtkStyleContext.See [method
Gtk.StyleContext.add_provider] and [funcGtk.StyleContext.add_provider_for_display] for addingGtkStyleProviders.GTK uses the
GtkStyleProviderimplementation for CSS in [ifaceGtk.CssProvider].The
See moreStyleProviderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkStyleProviderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeStyleProvider. Alternatively, useStyleProviderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol StyleProviderProtocol
-
Interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in
GtkTreeView.The
See moreTreeDragDestProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeDragDestinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeDragDest. Alternatively, useTreeDragDestRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeDragDestProtocol
-
Stores text and attributes for display in a
GtkTextView.You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GtkTextBuffer can support undoing changes to the buffer content, see [method
Gtk.TextBuffer.set_enable_undo].The
See moreTextBufferProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextBufferinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextBuffer. Alternatively, useTextBufferRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextBufferProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkTextChildAnchoris a spot in aGtkTextBufferwhere child widgets can be “anchored”.The anchor can have multiple widgets anchored, to allow for multiple views.
The
See moreTextChildAnchorProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextChildAnchorinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextChildAnchor. Alternatively, useTextChildAnchorRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextChildAnchorProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A
GtkTextMarkis a position in aGtkTextbufferthat is preserved across modifications.You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
A
GtkTextMarkis like a bookmark in a text buffer; it preserves a position in the text. You can convert the mark to an iterator using [methodGtk.TextBuffer.get_iter_at_mark]. Unlike iterators, marks remain valid across buffer mutations, because their behavior is defined when text is inserted or deleted. When text containing a mark is deleted, the mark remains in the position originally occupied by the deleted text. When text is inserted at a mark, a mark with “left gravity” will be moved to the beginning of the newly-inserted text, and a mark with “right gravity” will be moved to the end.Note that “left” and “right” here refer to logical direction (left is the toward the start of the buffer); in some languages such as Hebrew the logically-leftmost text is not actually on the left when displayed.
Marks are reference counted, but the reference count only controls the validity of the memory; marks can be deleted from the buffer at any time with [method
Gtk.TextBuffer.delete_mark]. Once deleted from the buffer, a mark is essentially useless.Marks optionally have names; these can be convenient to avoid passing the
GtkTextMarkobject around.Marks are typically created using the [method
Gtk.TextBuffer.create_mark] function.The
See moreTextMarkProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextMarkinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextMark. Alternatively, useTextMarkRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextMarkProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A tag that can be applied to text contained in a
GtkTextBuffer.You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
Tags should be in the [class
Gtk.TextTagTable] for a givenGtkTextBufferbefore using them with that buffer.[method
Gtk.TextBuffer.create_tag] is the best way to create tags. See “gtk4-demo” for numerous examples.For each property of
GtkTextTag, there is a “set” property, e.g. “font-set” corresponds to “font”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property has been set or not.They are maintained by GTK and you should not set them independently.
The
See moreTextTagProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextTaginstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextTag. Alternatively, useTextTagRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextTagProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
The collection of tags in a
GtkTextBufferYou may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
GtkTextTagTables as GtkBuildable
The
GtkTextTagTableimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports adding tags by specifying “tag” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.An example of a UI definition fragment specifying tags:
<object class="GtkTextTagTable"> <child type="tag"> <object class="GtkTextTag"/> </child> </object>The
See moreTextTagTableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextTagTableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextTagTable. Alternatively, useTextTagTableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextTagTableProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol
-
A widget that displays the contents of a [class
Gtk.TextBuffer].
You may wish to begin by reading the conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
CSS nodes
textview.view ├── border.top ├── border.left ├── text │ ╰── [selection] ├── border.right ├── border.bottom ╰── [window.popup]GtkTextViewhas a main css node with name textview and style class .view, and subnodes for each of the border windows, and the main text area, with names border and text, respectively. The border nodes each get one of the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom.A node representing the selection will appear below the text node.
If a context menu is opened, the window node will appear as a subnode of the main node.
Accessibility
GtkTextViewuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_TEXT_BOXrole.The
See moreTextViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextView. Alternatively, useTextViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextViewProtocol : ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A
GtkToggleButtonis a button which remains “pressed-in” when clicked.Clicking again will cause the toggle button to return to its normal state.
A toggle button is created by calling either [ctor
Gtk.ToggleButton.new] or [ctorGtk.ToggleButton.new_with_label]. If using the former, it is advisable to pack a widget, (such as aGtkLabeland/or aGtkImage), into the toggle button’s container. (See [classGtk.Button] for more information).The state of a
GtkToggleButtoncan be set specifically using [methodGtk.ToggleButton.set_active], and retrieved using [methodGtk.ToggleButton.get_active].To simply switch the state of a toggle button, use [method
Gtk.ToggleButton.toggled].Grouping
Toggle buttons can be grouped together, to form mutually exclusive groups - only one of the buttons can be toggled at a time, and toggling another one will switch the currently toggled one off.
To add a
GtkToggleButtonto a group, use [methodGtk.ToggleButton.set_group].CSS nodes
GtkToggleButtonhas a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate it from a plainGtkButton, it gets the .toggle style class.Creating two
GtkToggleButtonwidgets.static void output_state (GtkToggleButton *source, gpointer user_data) { printf ("Active: `d`\n", gtk_toggle_button_get_active (source)); } void make_toggles (void) { GtkWidget *window, *toggle1, *toggle2; GtkWidget *box; const char *text; window = gtk_window_new (); box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 12); text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button."; toggle1 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text); g_signal_connect (toggle1, "toggled", G_CALLBACK (output_state), NULL); gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle1); text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button."; toggle2 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text); g_signal_connect (toggle2, "toggled", G_CALLBACK (output_state), NULL); gtk_box_append (GTK_BOX (box), toggle2); gtk_window_set_child (GTK_WINDOW (window), box); gtk_widget_show (window); }The
See moreToggleButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkToggleButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeToggleButton. Alternatively, useToggleButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ToggleButtonProtocol : ButtonProtocol
-
GtkTooltipis an object representing a widget tooltip.Basic tooltips can be realized simply by using [method
Gtk.Widget.set_tooltip_text] or [methodGtk.Widget.set_tooltip_markup] without any explicit tooltip object.When you need a tooltip with a little more fancy contents, like adding an image, or you want the tooltip to have different contents per
GtkTreeViewrow or cell, you will have to do a little more work:Set the [property
Gtk.Widget:has-tooltip] property totrue. This will make GTK monitor the widget for motion and related events which are needed to determine when and where to show a tooltip.Connect to the [signal
Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip] signal. This signal will be emitted when a tooltip is supposed to be shown. One of the arguments passed to the signal handler is aGtkTooltipobject. This is the object that we are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback using functions like [methodGtk.Tooltip.set_icon]. There are functions for setting the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in a custom widget.Return
truefrom yourquery-tooltiphandler. This causes the tooltip to be show. If you returnfalse, it will not be shown.
The
See moreTooltipProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTooltipinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTooltip. Alternatively, useTooltipRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TooltipProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkTreeExpanderis a widget that provides an expander for a list.It is typically placed as a bottommost child into a
GtkListViewto allow users to expand and collapse children in a list with a [classGtk.TreeListModel].GtkTreeExpanderprovides the common UI elements, gestures and keybindings for this purpose.On top of this, the “listitem.expand”, “listitem.collapse” and “listitem.toggle-expand” actions are provided to allow adding custom UI for managing expanded state.
The
GtkTreeListModelmust be set to not be passthrough. Then it will provide [classGtk.TreeListRow] items which can be set via [methodGtk.TreeExpander.set_list_row] on the expander. The expander will then watch that row item automatically. [methodGtk.TreeExpander.set_child] sets the widget that displays the actual row contents.CSS nodes
treeexpander ├── [indent]* ├── [expander] ╰── <child>GtkTreeExpanderhas zero or one CSS nodes with the name “expander” that should display the expander icon. The node will be:checkedwhen it is expanded. If the node is not expandable, an “indent” node will be displayed instead.For every level of depth, another “indent” node is prepended.
Accessibility
GtkTreeExpanderuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle. The expander icon is represented as aGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_BUTTON, labelled by the expander’s child, and toggling it will change theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_STATE_EXPANDEDstate.The
See moreTreeExpanderProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeExpanderinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeExpander. Alternatively, useTreeExpanderRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeExpanderProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkTreeListModelis a list model that can create child models on demand.The
See moreTreeListModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListModel. Alternatively, useTreeListModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListModelProtocol : ListModelProtocol, ObjectProtocol
-
GtkTreeListRowis used byGtkTreeListModelto represent items.It allows navigating the model as a tree and modify the state of rows.
GtkTreeListRowinstances are created by aGtkTreeListModelonly when the [propertyGtk.TreeListModel:passthrough] property is not set.There are various support objects that can make use of
GtkTreeListRowobjects, such as the [classGtk.TreeExpander] widget that allows displaying an icon to expand or collapse a row or [classGtk.TreeListRowSorter] that makes it possible to sort trees properly.The
See moreTreeListRowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListRowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListRow. Alternatively, useTreeListRowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListRowProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkTreeListRowSorteris a special-purpose sorter that will apply a given sorter to the levels in a tree.Here is an example for setting up a column view with a tree model and a
GtkTreeListSorter:column_sorter = gtk_column_view_get_sorter (view); sorter = gtk_tree_list_row_sorter_new (g_object_ref (column_sorter)); sort_model = gtk_sort_list_model_new (tree_model, sorter); selection = gtk_single_selection_new (sort_model); gtk_column_view_set_model (view, G_LIST_MODEL (selection));The
See moreTreeListRowSorterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListRowSorterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListRowSorter. Alternatively, useTreeListRowSorterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListRowSorterProtocol : SorterProtocol
-
A
GtkTreeModelwhich hides parts of an underlying tree modelA
GtkTreeModelFilteris a tree model which wraps another tree model, and can do the following things:Filter specific rows, based on data from a “visible column”, a column storing booleans indicating whether the row should be filtered or not, or based on the return value of a “visible function”, which gets a model, iter and user_data and returns a boolean indicating whether the row should be filtered or not.
Modify the “appearance” of the model, using a modify function. This is extremely powerful and allows for just changing some values and also for creating a completely different model based on the given child model.
Set a different root node, also known as a “virtual root”. You can pass in a
GtkTreePathindicating the root node for the filter at construction time.
The basic API is similar to
GtkTreeModelSort. For an example on its usage, see the section onGtkTreeModelSort.When using
GtkTreeModelFilter, it is important to realize thatGtkTreeModelFiltermaintains an internal cache of all nodes which are visible in its clients. The cache is likely to be a subtree of the tree exposed by the child model.GtkTreeModelFilterwill not cache the entire child model when unnecessary to not compromise the caching mechanism that is exposed by the reference counting scheme. If the child model implements reference counting, unnecessary signals may not be emitted because of reference counting rule 3, see theGtkTreeModeldocumentation. (Note that e.g.GtkTreeStoredoes not implement reference counting and will always emit all signals, even when the receiving node is not visible).Because of this, limitations for possible visible functions do apply. In general, visible functions should only use data or properties from the node for which the visibility state must be determined, its siblings or its parents. Usually, having a dependency on the state of any child node is not possible, unless references are taken on these explicitly. When no such reference exists, no signals may be received for these child nodes (see reference counting rule number 3 in the
GtkTreeModelsection).Determining the visibility state of a given node based on the state of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore,
GtkTreeModelFilterexplicitly supports this. For example, when a node does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible. As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order to accommodate this,
GtkTreeModelFiltermust make sure the necessary signals are received from the child model. This is achieved by building, for all nodes which are exposed as visible nodes toGtkTreeModelFilter‘s clients, the child level (if any) and take a reference on the first node in this level. Furthermore, for every row-inserted, row-changed or row-deleted signal (also these which were not handled because the node was not cached),GtkTreeModelFilterwill check if the visibility state of any parent node has changed.Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your own. In this case, either rely on
GtkTreeStoreto emit all signals because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels yourself.The
See moreTreeModelFilterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelFilterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModelFilter. Alternatively, useTreeModelFilterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelFilterProtocol : ObjectProtocol, TreeDragSourceProtocol, TreeModelProtocol
-
A GtkTreeModel which makes an underlying tree model sortable
The
GtkTreeModelSortis a model which implements theGtkTreeSortableinterface. It does not hold any data itself, but rather is created with a child model and proxies its data. It has identical column types to this child model, and the changes in the child are propagated. The primary purpose of this model is to provide a way to sort a different model without modifying it. Note that the sort function used byGtkTreeModelSortis not guaranteed to be stable.The use of this is best demonstrated through an example. In the following sample code we create two
GtkTreeViewwidgets each with a view of the same data. As the model is wrapped here by aGtkTreeModelSort, the twoGtkTreeViews can each sort their view of the data without affecting the other. By contrast, if we simply put the same model in each widget, then sorting the first would sort the second.Using a
GtkTreeModelSort(C Language Example):
{ GtkTreeView *tree_view1; GtkTreeView *tree_view2; GtkTreeModel *sort_model1; GtkTreeModel *sort_model2; GtkTreeModel *child_model; // get the child model child_model = get_my_model (); // Create the first tree sort_model1 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model); tree_view1 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model1); // Create the second tree sort_model2 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model); tree_view2 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model2); // Now we can sort the two models independently gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model1), COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_ASCENDING); gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model2), COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_DESCENDING); }To demonstrate how to access the underlying child model from the sort model, the next example will be a callback for the
GtkTreeSelectionGtkTreeSelectionchanged`` signal. In this callback, we get a string from COLUMN_1 of the model. We then modify the string, find the same selected row on the child model, and change the row there.Accessing the child model of in a selection changed callback
(C Language Example):
void selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection, gpointer data) { GtkTreeModel *sort_model = NULL; GtkTreeModel *child_model; GtkTreeIter sort_iter; GtkTreeIter child_iter; char *some_data = NULL; char *modified_data; // Get the current selected row and the model. if (! gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (selection, &sort_model, &sort_iter)) return; // Look up the current value on the selected row and get // a new value to change it to. gtk_tree_model_get (GTK_TREE_MODEL (sort_model), &sort_iter, COLUMN_1, &some_data, -1); modified_data = change_the_data (some_data); g_free (some_data); // Get an iterator on the child model, instead of the sort model. gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model), &child_iter, &sort_iter); // Get the child model and change the value of the row. In this // example, the child model is a GtkListStore. It could be any other // type of model, though. child_model = gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model)); gtk_list_store_set (GTK_LIST_STORE (child_model), &child_iter, COLUMN_1, &modified_data, -1); g_free (modified_data); }The
See moreTreeModelSortProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelSortinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModelSort. Alternatively, useTreeModelSortRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelSortProtocol : ObjectProtocol, TreeDragSourceProtocol, TreeSortableProtocol
-
The selection object for GtkTreeView
The
GtkTreeSelectionobject is a helper object to manage the selection for aGtkTreeViewwidget. TheGtkTreeSelectionobject is automatically created when a newGtkTreeViewwidget is created, and cannot exist independently of this widget. The primary reason theGtkTreeSelectionobjects exists is for cleanliness of code and API. That is, there is no conceptual reason all these functions could not be methods on theGtkTreeViewwidget instead of a separate function.The
GtkTreeSelectionobject is gotten from aGtkTreeViewby callinggtk_tree_view_get_selection(). It can be manipulated to check the selection status of the tree, as well as select and deselect individual rows. Selection is done completely view side. As a result, multiple views of the same model can have completely different selections. Additionally, you cannot change the selection of a row on the model that is not currently displayed by the view without expanding its parents first.One of the important things to remember when monitoring the selection of a view is that the
GtkTreeSelectionchangedsignal is mostly a hint. That is, it may only emit one signal when a range of rows is selected. Additionally, it may on occasion emit aGtkTreeSelectionchangedsignal when nothing has happened (mostly as a result of programmers calling select_row on an already selected row).The
See moreTreeSelectionProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeSelectioninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeSelection. Alternatively, useTreeSelectionRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeSelectionProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
A tree-like data structure that can be used with the GtkTreeView
The
GtkTreeStoreobject is a list model for use with aGtkTreeViewwidget. It implements theGtkTreeModelinterface, and consequently, can use all of the methods available there. It also implements theGtkTreeSortableinterface so it can be sorted by the view. Finally, it also implements the tree drag and drop interfaces.GtkTreeStore as GtkBuildable
The GtkTreeStore implementation of the
GtkBuildableinterface allows to specify the model columns with a <columns> element that may contain multiple <column> elements, each specifying one model column. The “type” attribute specifies the data type for the column.An example of a UI Definition fragment for a tree store:
<object class="GtkTreeStore"> <columns> <column type="gchararray"/> <column type="gchararray"/> <column type="gint"/> </columns> </object>The
See moreTreeStoreProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeStoreinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeStore. Alternatively, useTreeStoreRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeStoreProtocol : ObjectProtocol, BuildableProtocol, TreeDragDestProtocol, TreeDragSourceProtocol, TreeSortableProtocol
-
A widget for displaying both trees and lists
Widget that displays any object that implements the [iface
Gtk.TreeModel] interface.Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together.
Coordinate systems in GtkTreeView API
Several different coordinate systems are exposed in the
GtkTreeViewAPI. These are:
Widget coordinates: Coordinates relative to the widget (usually
widget->window).Bin window coordinates: Coordinates relative to the window that GtkTreeView renders to.
Tree coordinates: Coordinates relative to the entire scrollable area of GtkTreeView. These coordinates start at (0, 0) for row 0 of the tree.
Several functions are available for converting between the different coordinate systems. The most common translations are between widget and bin window coordinates and between bin window and tree coordinates. For the former you can use method
Gtk.TreeView.convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords, for the latter methodGtk.TreeView.convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords.GtkTreeViewasGtkBuildableThe
GtkTreeViewimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface accepts [classGtk.TreeViewColumn] objects as<child>elements and exposes the internal [classGtk.TreeSelection] in UI definitions.An example of a UI definition fragment with
GtkTreeView:<object class="GtkTreeView" id="treeview"> <property name="model">liststore1</property> <child> <object class="GtkTreeViewColumn" id="test-column"> <property name="title">Test</property> <child> <object class="GtkCellRendererText" id="test-renderer"/> <attributes> <attribute name="text">1</attribute> </attributes> </child> </object> </child> <child internal-child="selection"> <object class="GtkTreeSelection" id="selection"> <signal name="changed" handler="on_treeview_selection_changed"/> </object> </child> </object>CSS nodes
treeview.view ├── header │ ├── button │ │ ╰── [sort-indicator] ┊ ┊ │ ╰── button │ ╰── [sort-indicator] │ ├── [rubberband] ╰── [dndtarget]GtkTreeViewhas a main CSS node with nametreeviewand style class.view. It has a subnode with nameheader, which is the parent for all the column header widgets’ CSS nodes.Each column header consists of a
button, which among other content, has a child with namesort-indicator, which carries the.ascendingor.descendingstyle classes when the column header should show a sort indicator. The CSS is expected to provide a suitable image using the-gtk-icon-sourceproperty.For rubberband selection, a subnode with name
rubberbandis used.For the drop target location during DND, a subnode with name
dndtargetis used.The
See moreTreeViewProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeViewinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeView. Alternatively, useTreeViewRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeViewProtocol : ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
A visible column in a GtkTreeView widget
The GtkTreeViewColumn object represents a visible column in a
GtkTreeViewwidget. It allows to set properties of the column header, and functions as a holding pen for the cell renderers which determine how the data in the column is displayed.Please refer to the tree widget conceptual overview for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how they work together, and to the
GtkTreeViewdocumentation for specifics about the CSS node structure for treeviews and their headers.The
See moreTreeViewColumnProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeViewColumninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeViewColumn. Alternatively, useTreeViewColumnRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeViewColumnProtocol : InitiallyUnownedProtocol, BuildableProtocol, CellLayoutProtocol
-
GtkVideois a widget to show aGtkMediaStreamwith media controls.
The controls are available separately as [class
Gtk.MediaControls]. If you just want to display a video without controls, you can treat it like any other paintable and for example put it into a [classGtk.Picture].GtkVideoaims to cover use cases such as previews, embedded animations, etc. It supports autoplay, looping, and simple media controls. It does not have support for video overlays, multichannel audio, device selection, or input. If you are writing a full-fledged video player, you may want to use the [classGdk.Paintable] API and a media framework such as Gstreamer directly.The
See moreVideoProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkVideoinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeVideo. Alternatively, useVideoRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol VideoProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
The
See moreTextChildAnchorClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextChildAnchorClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextChildAnchorClass. Alternatively, useTextChildAnchorClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextChildAnchorClassProtocol
-
An iterator for the contents of a
GtkTextBuffer.You may wish to begin by reading the text widget conceptual overview, which gives an overview of all the objects and data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
The
See moreTextIterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextIterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextIter. Alternatively, useTextIterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextIterProtocol
-
The
See moreTextMarkClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextMarkClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextMarkClass. Alternatively, useTextMarkClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextMarkClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTextTagClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextTagClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextTagClass. Alternatively, useTextTagClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextTagClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTextViewClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTextViewClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTextViewClass. Alternatively, useTextViewClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TextViewClassProtocol
-
The
See moreToggleButtonClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkToggleButtonClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeToggleButtonClass. Alternatively, useToggleButtonClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ToggleButtonClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeDragDestIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeDragDestIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeDragDestIface. Alternatively, useTreeDragDestIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeDragDestIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeDragSourceIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeDragSourceIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeDragSourceIface. Alternatively, useTreeDragSourceIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeDragSourceIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeExpanderClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeExpanderClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeExpanderClass. Alternatively, useTreeExpanderClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeExpanderClassProtocol
-
The
GtkTreeIteris the primary structure for accessing aGtkTreeModel. Models are expected to put a unique integer in thestampmember, and put model-specific data in the threeuser_datamembers.The
See moreTreeIterProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeIterinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeIter. Alternatively, useTreeIterRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeIterProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeListModelClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListModelClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListModelClass. Alternatively, useTreeListModelClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListModelClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeListRowClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListRowClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListRowClass. Alternatively, useTreeListRowClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListRowClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeListRowSorterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeListRowSorterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeListRowSorterClass. Alternatively, useTreeListRowSorterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeListRowSorterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeModelFilterClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelFilterClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModelFilterClass. Alternatively, useTreeModelFilterClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelFilterClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeModelIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModelIface. Alternatively, useTreeModelIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeModelSortClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelSortClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModelSortClass. Alternatively, useTreeModelSortClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelSortClassProtocol
-
An opaque structure representing a path to a row in a model.
The
See moreTreePathProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreePathinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreePath. Alternatively, useTreePathRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreePathProtocol
-
A GtkTreeRowReference tracks model changes so that it always refers to the same row (a
GtkTreePathrefers to a position, not a fixed row). Create a new GtkTreeRowReference withgtk_tree_row_reference_new().The
See moreTreeRowReferenceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeRowReferenceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeRowReference. Alternatively, useTreeRowReferenceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeRowReferenceProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeSortableIfaceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeSortableIfaceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeSortableIface. Alternatively, useTreeSortableIfaceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeSortableIfaceProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeStoreClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeStoreClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeStoreClass. Alternatively, useTreeStoreClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeStoreClassProtocol
-
The
See moreTreeViewClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeViewClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeViewClass. Alternatively, useTreeViewClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeViewClassProtocol
-
The
See moreVideoClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkVideoClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeVideoClass. Alternatively, useVideoClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol VideoClassProtocol
-
Interface for Drag-and-Drop destinations in
GtkTreeView.The
See moreTreeDragSourceProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeDragSourceinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeDragSource. Alternatively, useTreeDragSourceRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeDragSourceProtocol
-
The tree interface used by GtkTreeView
The
GtkTreeModelinterface defines a generic tree interface for use by theGtkTreeViewwidget. It is an abstract interface, and is designed to be usable with any appropriate data structure. The programmer just has to implement this interface on their own data type for it to be viewable by aGtkTreeViewwidget.The model is represented as a hierarchical tree of strongly-typed, columned data. In other words, the model can be seen as a tree where every node has different values depending on which column is being queried. The type of data found in a column is determined by using the GType system (ie.
G_TYPE_INT,GTK_TYPE_BUTTON,G_TYPE_POINTER, etc). The types are homogeneous per column across all nodes. It is important to note that this interface only provides a way of examining a model and observing changes. The implementation of each individual model decides how and if changes are made.In order to make life simpler for programmers who do not need to write their own specialized model, two generic models are provided — the
GtkTreeStoreand theGtkListStore. To use these, the developer simply pushes data into these models as necessary. These models provide the data structure as well as all appropriate tree interfaces. As a result, implementing drag and drop, sorting, and storing data is trivial. For the vast majority of trees and lists, these two models are sufficient.Models are accessed on a node/column level of granularity. One can query for the value of a model at a certain node and a certain column on that node. There are two structures used to reference a particular node in a model. They are the [struct
Gtk.TreePath] and the structGtk.TreeIter. Most of the interface consists of operations on a [structGtk.TreeIter].A path is essentially a potential node. It is a location on a model that may or may not actually correspond to a node on a specific model. A [struct
Gtk.TreePath] can be converted into either an array of unsigned integers or a string. The string form is a list of numbers separated by a colon. Each number refers to the offset at that level. Thus, the path0refers to the root node and the path2:4refers to the fifth child of the third node.By contrast, a [struct
Gtk.TreeIter] is a reference to a specific node on a specific model. It is a generic struct with an integer and three generic pointers. These are filled in by the model in a model-specific way. One can convert a path to an iterator by callinggtk_tree_model_get_iter(). These iterators are the primary way of accessing a model and are similar to the iterators used byGtkTextBuffer. They are generally statically allocated on the stack and only used for a short time. The model interface defines a set of operations using them for navigating the model.It is expected that models fill in the iterator with private data. For example, the
GtkListStoremodel, which is internally a simple linked list, stores a list node in one of the pointers. TheGtkTreeModelSort stores an array and an offset in two of the pointers. Additionally, there is an integer field. This field is generally filled with a unique stamp per model. This stamp is for catching errors resulting from using invalid iterators with a model.The lifecycle of an iterator can be a little confusing at first. Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model is unchanged (and doesn’t emit a signal). The model is considered to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers to is valid (most notably the
GtkTreeStoreandGtkListStore). Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for the case where iterators do not persist beyond a signal, some very important performance enhancements were made in the sort model. As a result, theGTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSISTflag was added to indicate this behavior.To help show some common operation of a model, some examples are provided. The first example shows three ways of getting the iter at the location
3:2:5. While the first method shown is easier, the second is much more common, as you often get paths from callbacks.Acquiring a
GtkTreeIter// Three ways of getting the iter pointing to the location GtkTreePath *path; GtkTreeIter iter; GtkTreeIter parent_iter; // get the iterator from a string gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model, &iter, "3:2:5"); // get the iterator from a path path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("3:2:5"); gtk_tree_model_get_iter (model, &iter, path); gtk_tree_path_free (path); // walk the tree to find the iterator gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter, NULL, 3); parent_iter = iter; gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter, &parent_iter, 2); parent_iter = iter; gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter, &parent_iter, 5);This second example shows a quick way of iterating through a list and getting a string and an integer from each row. The
populate_model()function used below is not shown, as it is specific to theGtkListStore. For information on how to write such a function, see theGtkListStoredocumentation.Reading data from a
GtkTreeModelenum { STRING_COLUMN, INT_COLUMN, N_COLUMNS }; ... GtkTreeModel *list_store; GtkTreeIter iter; gboolean valid; int row_count = 0; // make a new list_store list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS, G_TYPE_STRING, G_TYPE_INT); // Fill the list store with data populate_model (list_store); // Get the first iter in the list, check it is valid and walk // through the list, reading each row. valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (list_store, &iter); while (valid) { char *str_data; int int_data; // Make sure you terminate calls to `gtk_tree_model_get()` with a “-1” value gtk_tree_model_get (list_store, &iter, STRING_COLUMN, &str_data, INT_COLUMN, &int_data, -1); // Do something with the data g_print ("Row `d:` (`s`,`d`)\n", row_count, str_data, int_data); g_free (str_data); valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (list_store, &iter); row_count++; }The
GtkTreeModelinterface contains two methods for reference counting:gtk_tree_model_ref_node()andgtk_tree_model_unref_node(). These two methods are optional to implement. The reference counting is meant as a way for views to let models know when nodes are being displayed.GtkTreeViewwill take a reference on a node when it is visible, which means the node is either in the toplevel or expanded. Being displayed does not mean that the node is currently directly visible to the user in the viewport. Based on this reference counting scheme a caching model, for example, can decide whether or not to cache a node based on the reference count. A file-system based model would not want to keep the entire file hierarchy in memory, but just the folders that are currently expanded in every current view.When working with reference counting, the following rules must be taken into account:
Never take a reference on a node without owning a reference on its parent. This means that all parent nodes of a referenced node must be referenced as well.
Outstanding references on a deleted node are not released. This is not possible because the node has already been deleted by the time the row-deleted signal is received.
Models are not obligated to emit a signal on rows of which none of its siblings are referenced. To phrase this differently, signals are only required for levels in which nodes are referenced. For the root level however, signals must be emitted at all times (however the root level is always referenced when any view is attached).
The
See moreTreeModelProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeModelinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeModel. Alternatively, useTreeModelRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeModelProtocol
-
The interface for sortable models used by GtkTreeView
GtkTreeSortableis an interface to be implemented by tree models which support sorting. TheGtkTreeViewuses the methods provided by this interface to sort the model.The
See moreTreeSortableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkTreeSortableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeTreeSortable. Alternatively, useTreeSortableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol TreeSortableProtocol : TreeModelProtocol
-
GtkViewportimplements scrollability for widgets that lack their own scrolling capabilities.Use
GtkViewportto scroll child widgets such asGtkGrid,GtkBox, and so on.The
GtkViewportwill start scrolling content only if allocated less than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.CSS nodes
GtkViewporthas a single CSS node with nameviewport.Accessibility
GtkViewportuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreViewportProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkViewportinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeViewport. Alternatively, useViewportRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol ViewportProtocol : ScrollableProtocol, WidgetProtocol
-
GtkVolumeButtonis aGtkScaleButtonsubclass tailored for volume control.
The
See moreVolumeButtonProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkVolumeButtoninstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeVolumeButton. Alternatively, useVolumeButtonRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol VolumeButtonProtocol : ScaleButtonProtocol
-
The base class for all widgets.
GtkWidgetis the base class all widgets in GTK derive from. It manages the widget lifecycle, layout, states and style.Height-for-width Geometry Management
GTK uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for width-for-height). The most common example is a label that reflows to fill up the available width, wraps to fewer lines, and therefore needs less height.
Height-for-width geometry management is implemented in GTK by way of two virtual methods:
- [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.get_request_mode] - [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.measure]
There are some important things to keep in mind when implementing height-for-width and when using it in widget implementations.
If you implement a direct
GtkWidgetsubclass that supports height-for-width or width-for-height geometry management for itself or its child widgets, the [vfuncGtk.Widget.get_request_mode] virtual function must be implemented as well and return the widget’s preferred request mode. The default implementation of this virtual function returnsGTK_SIZE_REQUEST_CONSTANT_SIZE, which means that the widget will only ever get -1 passed as the for_size value to its [vfuncGtk.Widget.measure] implementation.The geometry management system will query a widget hierarchy in only one orientation at a time. When widgets are initially queried for their minimum sizes it is generally done in two initial passes in the [enum
Gtk.SizeRequestMode] chosen by the toplevel.For example, when queried in the normal
GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTHmode:First, the default minimum and natural width for each widget in the interface will be computed using [id
gtk_widget_measure] with an orientation ofGTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTALand a for_size of -1. Because the preferred widths for each widget depend on the preferred widths of their children, this information propagates up the hierarchy, and finally a minimum and natural width is determined for the entire toplevel. Next, the toplevel will use the minimum width to query for the minimum height contextual to that width using [idgtk_widget_measure] with an orientation ofGTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICALand a for_size of the just computed width. This will also be a highly recursive operation. The minimum height for the minimum width is normally used to set the minimum size constraint on the toplevel.After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size previously specified with [method
Gtk.Window.set_default_size]). During the recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles will be recursively executed while widgets allocate their children. Each widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the space in one orientation among its children and then request each child’s height for its target allocated width or its width for allocated height, depending. In this way aGtkWidgetwill typically be requested its size a number of times before actually being allocated a size. The size a widget is finally allocated can of course differ from the size it has requested. For this reason,GtkWidgetcaches a small number of results to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.If a widget does move content around to intelligently use up the allocated size then it must support the request in both
GtkSizeRequestModes even if the widget in question only trades sizes in a single orientation.For instance, a [class
Gtk.Label] that does height-for-width word wrapping will not expect to have [vfuncGtk.Widget.measure] with an orientation ofGTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICALcalled because that call is specific to a width-for-height request. In this case the label must return the height required for its own minimum possible width. By following this rule any widget that handles height-for-width or width-for-height requests will always be allocated at least enough space to fit its own content.Here are some examples of how a
GTK_SIZE_REQUEST_HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTHwidget generally deals with width-for-height requests:static void foo_widget_measure (GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation, int for_size, int *minimum_size, int *natural_size, int *minimum_baseline, int *natural_baseline) { if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) { // Calculate minimum and natural width } else // VERTICAL { if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode) { int min_width, dummy; // First, get the minimum width of our widget GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, -1, &min_width, &dummy, &dummy, &dummy); // Now use the minimum width to retrieve the minimum and natural height to display // that width. GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->measure (widget, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, min_width, minimum_size, natural_size, &dummy, &dummy); } else { // ... some widgets do both. } } }Often a widget needs to get its own request during size request or allocation. For example, when computing height it may need to also compute width. Or when deciding how to use an allocation, the widget may need to know its natural size. In these cases, the widget should be careful to call its virtual methods directly, like in the code example above.
It will not work to use the wrapper function [method
Gtk.Widget.measure] inside your own [vfuncGtk.Widget.size_allocate] implementation. These return a request adjusted by [classGtk.SizeGroup], the widget’s align and expand flags, as well as its CSS style.If a widget used the wrappers inside its virtual method implementations, then the adjustments (such as widget margins) would be applied twice. GTK therefore does not allow this and will warn if you try to do it.
Of course if you are getting the size request for another widget, such as a child widget, you must use [id
gtk_widget_measure]; otherwise, you would not properly consider widget margins, [classGtk.SizeGroup], and so forth.GTK also supports baseline vertical alignment of widgets. This means that widgets are positioned such that the typographical baseline of widgets in the same row are aligned. This happens if a widget supports baselines, has a vertical alignment of
GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE, and is inside a widget that supports baselines and has a natural “row” that it aligns to the baseline, or a baseline assigned to it by the grandparent.Baseline alignment support for a widget is also done by the [vfunc
Gtk.Widget.measure] virtual function. It allows you to report both a minimum and natural size.If a widget ends up baseline aligned it will be allocated all the space in the parent as if it was
GTK_ALIGN_FILL, but the selected baseline can be found via [idgtk_widget_get_allocated_baseline]. If the baseline has a value other than -1 you need to align the widget such that the baseline appears at the position.GtkWidget as GtkBuildable
The
GtkWidgetimplementation of theGtkBuildableinterface supports various custom elements to specify additional aspects of widgets that are not directly expressed as properties.If the widget uses a [class
Gtk.LayoutManager],GtkWidgetsupports a custom<layout>element, used to define layout properties:<object class="GtkGrid" id="my_grid"> <child> <object class="GtkLabel" id="label1"> <property name="label">Description</property> <layout> <property name="column">0</property> <property name="row">0</property> <property name="row-span">1</property> <property name="column-span">1</property> </layout> </object> </child> <child> <object class="GtkEntry" id="description_entry"> <layout> <property name="column">1</property> <property name="row">0</property> <property name="row-span">1</property> <property name="column-span">1</property> </layout> </object> </child> </object>GtkWidgetallows style information such as style classes to be associated with widgets, using the custom<style>element:<object class="GtkButton" id="button1"> <style> <class name="my-special-button-class"/> <class name="dark-button"/> </style> </object>GtkWidgetallows defining accessibility information, such as properties, relations, and states, using the custom<accessibility>element:<object class="GtkButton" id="button1"> <accessibility> <property name="label">Download</property> <relation name="labelled-by">label1</relation> </accessibility> </object>Building composite widgets from template XML
GtkWidgetexposes some facilities to automate the procedure of creating composite widgets using “templates”.To create composite widgets with
GtkBuilderXML, one must associate the interface description with the widget class at class initialization time using [methodGtk.WidgetClass.set_template].The interface description semantics expected in composite template descriptions is slightly different from regular [class
Gtk.Builder] XML.Unlike regular interface descriptions, [method
Gtk.WidgetClass.set_template] will expect a<template>tag as a direct child of the toplevel<interface>tag. The<template>tag must specify the “class” attribute which must be the type name of the widget. Optionally, the “parent” attribute may be specified to specify the direct parent type of the widget type, this is ignored byGtkBuilderbut required for UI design tools like Glade to introspect what kind of properties and internal children exist for a given type when the actual type does not exist.The XML which is contained inside the
<template>tag behaves as if it were added to the<object>tag defining the widget itself. You may set properties on a widget by inserting<property>tags into the<template>tag, and also add<child>tags to add children and extend a widget in the normal way you would with<object>tags.Additionally,
<object>tags can also be added before and after the initial<template>tag in the normal way, allowing one to define auxiliary objects which might be referenced by other widgets declared as children of the<template>tag.An example of a template definition:
<interface> <template class="FooWidget" parent="GtkBox"> <property name="orientation">horizontal</property> <property name="spacing">4</property> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button"> <property name="label">Hello World</property> <signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button_clicked" object="FooWidget" swapped="yes"/> </object> </child> <child> <object class="GtkButton" id="goodbye_button"> <property name="label">Goodbye World</property> </object> </child> </template> </interface>Typically, you’ll place the template fragment into a file that is bundled with your project, using
GResource. In order to load the template, you need to call [methodGtk.WidgetClass.set_template_from_resource] from the class initialization of yourGtkWidgettype:static void foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass) { // ... gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui"); }You will also need to call [method
Gtk.Widget.init_template] from the instance initialization function:static void foo_widget_init (FooWidget *self) { // ... gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (self)); }You can access widgets defined in the template using the [id
gtk_widget_get_template_child] function, but you will typically declare a pointer in the instance private data structure of your type using the same name as the widget in the template definition, and call methodGtk.WidgetClass.bind_template_child_fullwith that name, e.g.typedef struct { GtkWidget *hello_button; GtkWidget *goodbye_button; } FooWidgetPrivate; G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (FooWidget, foo_widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX) static void foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass) { // ... gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui"); gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), FooWidget, hello_button); gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), FooWidget, goodbye_button); } static void foo_widget_init (FooWidget *widget) { }You can also use method
Gtk.WidgetClass.bind_template_callback_fullto connect a signal callback defined in the template with a function visible in the scope of the class, e.g.// the signal handler has the instance and user data swapped // because of the swapped="yes" attribute in the template XML static void hello_button_clicked (FooWidget *self, GtkButton *button) { g_print ("Hello, world!\n"); } static void foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass) { // ... gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui"); gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), hello_button_clicked); }The
See moreWidgetProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWidgetinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWidget. Alternatively, useWidgetRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WidgetProtocol : InitiallyUnownedProtocol, AccessibleProtocol, BuildableProtocol, ConstraintTargetProtocol - [vfunc
-
The
See moreWidgetClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWidgetClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWidgetClass. Alternatively, useWidgetClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WidgetClassProtocol
-
The
See moreWidgetClassPrivateProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWidgetClassPrivateinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWidgetClassPrivate. Alternatively, useWidgetClassPrivateRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WidgetClassPrivateProtocol
-
The
See moreWidgetPaintableClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWidgetPaintableClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWidgetPaintableClass. Alternatively, useWidgetPaintableClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WidgetPaintableClassProtocol
-
The
See moreWindowClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowClass. Alternatively, useWindowClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowClassProtocol
-
The
See moreWindowControlsClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowControlsClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowControlsClass. Alternatively, useWindowControlsClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowControlsClassProtocol
-
The
See moreWindowGroupClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowGroupClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowGroupClass. Alternatively, useWindowGroupClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowGroupClassProtocol
-
The
See moreWindowHandleClassProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowHandleClassinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowHandleClass. Alternatively, useWindowHandleClassRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowHandleClassProtocol
-
GtkWidgetPaintableis aGdkPaintablethat displays the contents of a widget.GtkWidgetPaintablewill also take care of the widget not being in a state where it can be drawn (like when it isn’t shown) and just draw nothing or where it does not have a size (like when it is hidden) and report no size in that case.Of course,
GtkWidgetPaintableallows you to monitor widgets for size changes by emitting the [signalGdk.Paintable::invalidate-size] signal whenever the size of the widget changes as well as for visual changes by emitting the [signalGdk.Paintable::invalidate-contents] signal whenever the widget changes.You can use a
GtkWidgetPaintableeverywhere aGdkPaintableis allowed, including using it on aGtkPicture(or one of its parents) that it was set on itself viagtk_picture_set_paintable(). The paintable will take care of recursion when this happens. If you do this however, ensure that the [propertyGtk.Picture:can-shrink] property is set totrueor you might end up with an infinitely growing widget.The
See moreWidgetPaintableProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWidgetPaintableinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWidgetPaintable. Alternatively, useWidgetPaintableRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WidgetPaintableProtocol : ObjectProtocol, PaintableProtocol
-
A
GtkWindowis a toplevel window which can contain other widgets.
Windows normally have decorations that are under the control of the windowing system and allow the user to manipulate the window (resize it, move it, close it,…).
GtkWindow as GtkBuildable
The
GtkWindowimplementation of the [ifaceGtk.Buildable] interface supports setting a child as the titlebar by specifying “titlebar” as the “type” attribute of a <child> element.CSS nodes
window.background [.csd / .solid-csd / .ssd] [.maximized / .fullscreen / .tiled] ├── <child> ╰── <titlebar child>.titlebar [.default-decoration]GtkWindowhas a main CSS node with name window and style class .background.Style classes that are typically used with the main CSS node are .csd (when client-side decorations are in use), .solid-csd (for client-side decorations without invisible borders), .ssd (used by mutter when rendering server-side decorations). GtkWindow also represents window states with the following style classes on the main node: .maximized, .fullscreen, .tiled (when supported, also .tiled-top, .tiled-left, .tiled-right, .tiled-bottom).
GtkWindowsubclasses often add their own discriminating style classes, such as .dialog, .popup or .tooltip.Generally, some CSS properties don’t make sense on the toplevel window node, such as margins or padding. When client-side decorations without invisible borders are in use (i.e. the .solid-csd style class is added to the main window node), the CSS border of the toplevel window is used for resize drags. In the .csd case, the shadow area outside of the window can be used to resize it.
GtkWindowadds the .titlebar and .default-decoration style classes to the widget that is added as a titlebar child.Accessibility
GtkWindowuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_WINDOWrole.The
See moreWindowProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindow. Alternatively, useWindowRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowProtocol : RootProtocol, ShortcutManagerProtocol
-
GtkWindowControlsshows window frame controls.Typical window frame controls are minimize, maximize and close buttons, and the window icon.

GtkWindowControlsonly displays start or end side of the controls (see [propertyGtk.WindowControls:side]), so it’s intended to be always used in pair with anotherGtkWindowControlsfor the opposite side, for example:<object class="GtkBox"> <child> <object class="GtkWindowControls"> <property name="side">start</property> </object> </child> ... <child> <object class="GtkWindowControls"> <property name="side">end</property> </object> </child> </object>CSS nodes
windowcontrols ├── [image.icon] ├── [button.minimize] ├── [button.maximize] ╰── [button.close]A
GtkWindowControls‘ CSS node is called windowcontrols. It contains subnodes corresponding to each title button. Which of the title buttons exist and where they are placed exactly depends on the desktop environment and [propertyGtk.WindowControls:decoration-layout] value.When [property
Gtk.WindowControls:empty] istrue, it gets the .empty style class.Accessibility
GtkWindowControlsuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreWindowControlsProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowControlsinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowControls. Alternatively, useWindowControlsRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowControlsProtocol : WidgetProtocol
-
GtkWindowGroupmakes group of windows behave like separate applications.It achieves this by limiting the effect of GTK grabs and modality to windows in the same group.
A window can be a member in at most one window group at a time. Windows that have not been explicitly assigned to a group are implicitly treated like windows of the default window group.
GtkWindowGroupobjects are referenced by each window in the group, so once you have added all windows to aGtkWindowGroup, you can drop the initial reference to the window group withg_object_unref(). If the windows in the window group are subsequently destroyed, then they will be removed from the window group and drop their references on the window group; when all window have been removed, the window group will be freed.The
See moreWindowGroupProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowGroupinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowGroup. Alternatively, useWindowGroupRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowGroupProtocol : ObjectProtocol
-
GtkWindowHandleis a titlebar area widget.When added into a window, it can be dragged to move the window, and handles right click, double click and middle click as expected of a titlebar.
CSS nodes
GtkWindowHandlehas a single CSS node with the namewindowhandle.Accessibility
GtkWindowHandleuses theGTK_ACCESSIBLE_ROLE_GROUProle.The
See moreWindowHandleProtocolprotocol exposes the methods and properties of an underlyingGtkWindowHandleinstance. The default implementation of these can be found in the protocol extension below. For a concrete class that implements these methods and properties, seeWindowHandle. Alternatively, useWindowHandleRefas a lighweight,unownedreference if you already have an instance you just want to use.Declaration
Swift
public protocol WindowHandleProtocol : WidgetProtocol
View on GitHub
Install in Dash
Protocols Reference